Internal Revenue Bulletin 2000-7 (PDF rendition): IRS Revenue Rulings

us-irs-revenue-rulings-irb-2000-7-pdfInternal Revenue Bulletin 2000-7 (PDF rendition): IRS Revenue RulingsGuidance

Abrir fonte

Preserve advance releases and the authoritative Internal Revenue Bulletin rendition; directory timestamps are file-publication metadata, not legal effective dates. HTML bulletins begin June 2003; earlier available issues require full PDF parsing. Whole bulletin rendition: numbered items are identified below; other legal material and publisher context remain included. This is not a new standalone advance release.

INCOME TAX
T.D. 8864, page 614.
Final and temporary regulations under section 274 of the Code
relate to the substantiation of certain business expenses.
T.D. 8865, page 589.
Final regulations under sections 167(f) and 197 of the Code
provide guidance concerning the amortization of goodwill
and certain other intangible property.
T.D. 8867, page 620.
Final regulations under section 1296 of the Code relate to
the new mark-to-market election for stock of a passive for-
eign investment company (PFIC) and define the term “mar-
ketable stock.”
EMPLOYEE PLANS
Rev. Rul. 2000–8, page 617.
Cash or deferred arrangements; elective deferrals.
This ruling specifies the criteria to be met in order to auto-
matically reduce an employee’s compensation by a certain
amount and have that amount contributed as an elective de-
ferral to an employer’s section 401(k) plan. Rev. Rul. 98–30
amplified and superseded.
REG–113572–99, page 624.
Proposed regulations under section 132(f) of the Code pro-
vide guidance on qualified transportation fringe benefits pro-
vided by employers to employees. A public hearing is sched-
uled for June 1, 2000.
ADMINISTRATIVE
REG–100163–00, PAGE 633.
Proposed regulations under section 197 of the Code pro-
vide guidance on how the anti-churning rules of section
197(f) apply to partnership transactions involving sections
732(b) and 734(b). A public hearing is scheduled for
May 24, 2000.
Internal Revenue
bbuulllleettiinn
Bulletin No. 2000–7
February 14, 2000
HIGHLIGHTS
OF THIS ISSUE
These synopses are intended only as aids to the reader in
identifying the subject matter covered. They may not be
relied upon as authoritative interpretations.
Department of the Treasury
Internal Revenue Service
Actions Relating to Court Decisions is on the page following the Introduction.
Finding Lists begin on page ii.

February 14, 20002000–7 I.R.B.
The Internal Revenue Bulletin is the authoritative instrument
of the Commissioner of Internal Revenue for announcing offi-
cial rulings and procedures of the Internal Revenue Service
and for publishing Treasury Decisions, Executive Orders, Tax
Conventions, legislation, court decisions, and other items of
general interest. It is published weekly and may be obtained
from the Superintendent of Documents on a subscription
basis. Bulletin contents are consolidated semiannually into
Cumulative Bulletins, which are sold on a single-copy basis.
It is the policy of the Service to publish in the Bulletin all sub-
stantive rulings necessary to promote a uniform application
of the tax laws, including all rulings that supersede, revoke,
modify, or amend any of those previously published in the
Bulletin. All published rulings apply retroactively unless other-
wise indicated. Procedures relating solely to matters of in-
ternal management are not published; however, statements
of internal practices and procedures that affect the rights
and duties of taxpayers are published.
Revenue rulings represent the conclusions of the Service on
the application of the law to the pivotal facts stated in the
revenue ruling. In those based on positions taken in rulings
to taxpayers or technical advice to Service field offices,
identifying details and information of a confidential nature
are deleted to prevent unwarranted invasions of privacy and
to comply with statutory requirements.
Rulings and procedures reported in the Bulletin do not have
the force and effect of Treasury Department Regulations,
but they may be used as precedents. Unpublished rulings
will not be relied on, used, or cited as precedents by Service
personnel in the disposition of other cases. In applying pub-
lished rulings and procedures, the effect of subsequent leg-
islation, regulations, court decisions, rulings, and proce-
dures must be considered, and Service personnel and oth-
ers concerned are cautioned against reaching the same con-
clusions in other cases unless the facts and circumstances
are substantially the same.
The Bulletin is divided into four parts as follows:
Part I.—1986 Code.
This part includes rulings and decisions based on provisions
of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986.
Part II.—Treaties and Tax Legislation.
This part is divided into two subparts as follows: Subpart A,
Tax Conventions, and Subpart B, Legislation and Related
Committee Reports.
Part III.—Administrative, Procedural, and Miscellaneous.
To the extent practicable, pertinent cross references to
these subjects are contained in the other Parts and Sub-
parts. Also included in this part are Bank Secrecy Act Admin-
istrative Rulings. Bank Secrecy Act Administrative Rulings
are issued by the Department of the Treasury’s Office of the
Assistant Secretary (Enforcement).
Part IV.—Items of General Interest.
This part includes notices of proposed rulemakings, disbar-
ment and suspension lists, and announcements.
The first Bulletin for each month includes a cumulative index
for the matters published during the preceding months.
These monthly indexes are cumulated on a semiannual basis,
and are published in the first Bulletin of the succeeding semi-
annual period, respectively.
The IRS Mission
Provide America’s taxpayers top quality service by help-
ing them understand and meet their tax responsibilities
and by applying the tax law with integrity and fairness to
all.
Introduction
The contents of this publication are not copyrighted and may be reprinted freely. A citation of the Internal Revenue Bulletin as the source would be appropriate.
For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.

2000–7 I.R.B.February 14, 2000
It is the policy of the Internal Revenue
Service to announce at an early date
whether it will follow the holdings in cer-
tain cases. An Action on Decision is the
document making such an announcement.
An Action on Decision will be issued at
the discretion of the Service only on un-
appealed issues decided adverse to the
government. Generally, an Action on De-
cision is issued where its guidance would
be helpful to Service personnel working
with the same or similar issues. Unlike a
Treasury Regulation or a Revenue Ruling,
an Action on Decision is not an affirma-
tive statement of Service position. It is not
intended to serve as public guidance and
may not be cited as precedent.
Actions on Decisions shall be relied
upon within the Service only as conclu-
sions applying the law to the facts in the
particular case at the time the Action on
Decision was issued. Caution should be
exercised in extending the recommenda-
tion of the Action on Decision to similar
cases where the facts are different. More-
over, the recommendation in the Action
on Decision may be superseded by new
legislation, regulations, rulings, cases, or
Actions on Decisions.
Prior to 1991, the Service published ac-
quiescence or nonacquiescence only in
certain regular Tax Court opinions. The
Service has expanded its acquiescence
program to include other civil tax cases
where guidance is determined to be help-
ful. Accordingly, the Service now may ac-
quiesce or nonacquiesce in the holdings
of memorandum Tax Court opinions, as
well as those of the United States District
Courts, Claims Court, and Circuit Courts
of Appeal. Regardless of the court decid-
ing the case, the recommendation of any
Action on Decision will be published in
the Internal Revenue Bulletin.
The recommendation in every Action
on Decision will be summarized as ac-
quiescence, acquiescence in result only,
or nonacquiescence. Both “acquies-
cence” and “acquiescence in result only”
mean that the Service accepts the holding
of the court in a case and that the Service
will follow it in disposing of cases with
the same controlling facts. However, “ac-
quiescence” indicates neither approval
nor disapproval of the reasons assigned
by the court for its conclusions; whereas,
“acquiescence in result only” indicates
disagreement or concern with some or all
of those reasons. “Nonacquiescence” sig-
nifies that, although no further review
was sought, the Service does not agree
with the holding of the court and, gener-
ally, will not follow the decision in dis-
posing of cases involving other taxpay-
ers. In reference to an opinion of a circuit
court of appeals, a “nonacquiescence” in-
dicates that the Service will not follow
the holding on a nationwide basis. How-
ever, the Service will recognize the
precedential impact of the opinion on
cases arising within the venue of the de-
ciding circuit.
The Actions on Decisions published in
the weekly Internal Revenue Bulletin are
consolidated semiannually and appear in
the first Bulletin for July and the Cumu-
lative Bulletin for the first half of the
year. A semiannual consolidation also ap-
pears in the first Bulletin for the follow-
ing January and in the Cumulative Bul-
letin for the last half of the year.
The Commissioner ACQUIESCES in
result only in the following decision:
Ahadpour v. Commissioner,
1
T.C. Memo. 1999–9
T.C. Dkt. No. 4843–96
Actions Relating to Court Decisions
1
Acquiescence in result only relating to whether certain payments received by petitioners, pursuant to a sales agreement for real property, should be included in gross
income in the year received.

2000–7 I.R.B.589February 14, 2000
Section 197.—Amortization of
Goodwill and Certain Other
Intangibles
26 CFR 1.197–2: Amortization of goodwill and
certain other intangibles.
T.D. 8865
DEPARTMENT OF THE TREASURY
Internal Revenue Service
26 CFR Parts 1 and 602
Amortization of Intangible
Property
AGENCY: Internal Revenue Service
(IRS), Treasury.
ACTION: Final regulations.
SUMMARY: This document contains
final regulations relating to the amortiza-
tion of certain intangible property. The
final regulations reflect changes to the
law made by the Omnibus Budget Recon-
ciliation Act of 1993 (OBRA ’93) and af-
fect taxpayers who acquired intangible
property after August 10, 1993, or made a
retroactive election to apply OBRA ’93 to
intangibles acquired after July 25, 1991.
DATES: Effective Date: January 25,
2000.
Applicability Dates: These regulations
apply to property acquired after January
25, 2000]. Regulations to implement sec-
tion 197(e)(4)(D) are applicable August
11, 1993, for property acquired after Au-
gust 10, 1993 (or July 26, 1991, for prop-
erty acquired after July 25, 1991, if a
valid retroactive election has been made
under §1.197–1T).
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT: John Huffman at (202) 622-3110
(not a toll-free number).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Paperwork Reduction Act
The collection of information con-
tained in these final regulations has been
reviewed and, pending receipt and evalu-
ation of public comments, approved by
the Office of Management and Budget
(OMB) under 44 U.S.C. 3507 and as-
signed control number 1545-1671.
The collection of information in this
regulation is in §1.197–2(h)(9). This in-
formation is required in order to provide
guidance on the time and manner of mak-
ing the election under section
197(f)(9)(B). Under this election, the
seller of a section 197 intangible may pay
a tax on the sale in order to avoid the ap-
plication of the anti-churning rules of sec-
tion 197(f)(9) to the purchaser. This in-
formation will be used to confirm the
parties to the transaction, calculate any
additional tax due, and notify the pur-
chaser of the seller’s election. The likely
respondents are business or other for-
profit institutions.
Comments on the collection of informa-
tion should be sent to the Office of Man-
agement and Budget, Attn: Desk Officer
for the Department of the Treasury, Office
of Information and Regulatory Affairs,
Washington, DC 20503, with copies to the
Internal Revenue Service,Attn: IRS Re-
ports Clearance Officer, OP:FS:FP, Wash-
ington, DC 20224. Comments on the col-
lection of information should be received
by March 27, 2000. Comments are specifi-
cally requested concerning:
Whether the collection of information is
necessary for the proper performance of
the functions of the Internal Revenue Ser-
vice, including whether the information
will have practical utility;
The accuracy of the estimated burden as-
sociated with the collection of informa-
tion (see below);
How the quality, utility, and clarity of the
information to be collected may be en-
hanced;
How the burden of complying with the col-
lection of information may be minimized,
including through the application of auto-
mated collection techniques or other forms
of information technology; and
Estimates of capital or start-up costs and
costs of operation, maintenance, and pur-
chase of services to provide information.
Estimated total annual reporting burden:
1500 hours.
Estimated average annual burden hours
per respondent varies from 2 to 4 hours,
depending on individual circumstances,
with an estimated average of 3 hours.
Estimated number of respondents: 500
per year.
Estimated annual frequency of responses: 1
An agency may not conduct or sponsor,
and a person is not required to respond to,
a collection of information unless it dis-
plays a valid control number assigned by
the Office of Management and Budget.
Books or records relating to this collec-
tion of information must be retained as
long as their contents may become mater-
ial in the administration of any internal
revenue law. Generally, tax returns and
tax return information are confidential, as
required by 26 U.S.C. 6103.
Background
On January 16, 1997, the IRS published
proposed regulations REG–209709–94,
1997–1 C.B. 731, in the Federal Register
(62 F.R. 2336) inviting comments under
sections 167(f) and 197. A public hearing
was held May 15, 1997. Numerous com-
ments have been received. After considera-
tion of all the comments, the proposed reg-
ulations are adopted as revised by this
Treasury decision.
Explanation of Provisions
Section 162(k) Application
Example 4of the proposed regulation
§1.197–2(k) provided that amounts paid
for a covenant not to compete entered into
in connection with a redemption was
nondeductible under section 162(k) and
thus not subject to section 197. Commen-
tators suggested that guidance on the ap-
plication of section 162(k) to transactions
involving section 197 intangibles should
be addressed in regulations under section
162(k). No reference to section 162(k) is
made in the final regulations.
Purchase of a Trade or Business
Certain intangibles are excepted from
the application of section 197 if they are
not acquired as part of a purchase of a
trade or business. The proposed regula-
tions provide that, for purposes of section
197, a group of assets constitutes a trade
or business if their use would constitute a
trade or business under section 1060 (that
is, if goodwill or going concern value
could, under any circumstances, attach to
the assets). In addition, the proposed reg-
ulations treat a group of assets as a trade
Part I. Rulings and Decisions Under the Internal Revenue Code of 1986

February 14, 20005902000–7 I.R.B.
or business if they include any customer-
based intangibles or, with certain excep-
tions, any franchise, trademark, or trade
name (the per se rules). The preamble of
the proposed regulations state that the IRS
intends to provide additional guidance on
the circumstances in which a group of as-
sets is treated as a trade or business in reg-
ulations under section 1060.
Although a number of comments re-
quested that the final regulations under
section 197 provide such additional guid-
ance, the final regulations generally re-
tain, without amplification, the rules in
the proposed regulations. The IRS and
Treasury Department will, however, con-
tinue to consider this issue during the de-
velopment of final regulations under sec-
tion 1060.
Commentators also requested modifi-
cations to the per se rules. In response to
these comments, the final regulations
limit the applicability of these rules to the
cases specifically described in the legisla-
tive history of section 197 (that is, the ac-
quisition of a franchise, trademark, or
trade name). The final regulations retain
the proposed exceptions under which cer-
tain franchises, trademarks, and trade
names are disregarded in applying the per
se rules. In addition, the regulations clar-
ify that a license of a trademark or trade
name is also disregarded in applying the
per se rules.
Computer Software
The final regulations contain rules that
supersede certain of the procedures set
forth in Revenue Procedure 69–21
(1969–2 C.B. 303), which provides
guidelines relating to costs incurred to de-
velop, purchase, or lease computer soft-
ware. Specifically, the final regulations
provide that purchased computer software
is amortizable over 15 years if section 197
applies and over 36 months if the soft-
ware is not a section 197 intangible. In
addition, the regulations clarify that sec-
tion 197 (rather than §1.162–11) applies
to certain costs incurred with respect to
leased software (that is, costs to acquire a
section 197 intangible that is a limited in-
terest in software). Computer software
costs included, without being separately
stated, in the cost of the computer hard-
ware (bundled software) continue to be
capitalized and depreciated as part of the
computer hardware. In addition, the final
regulations treat software costs as cur-
rently deductible (and not subject to sec-
tion 197) if they are not chargeable to
capital account under the rules applicable
to licensing transactions (discussed
below) and are otherwise currently de-
ductible. The final regulations clarify
that, for this purpose, an amount de-
scribed in §1.162–11 is not currently de-
ductible if, without regard to §1.162–11,
such amount is properly chargeable to
capital account. A proper and consistent
practice of taking software costs into ac-
count under §1.162–11 may, however, be
continued if the costs are not subject to
section 197.
A revenue procedure superseding Rev.
Proc. 69–21 and providing procedures
consistent with the rules in the final regu-
lations will be issued in the near future.
In the meantime, taxpayers may not rely
on the procedures in Rev. Proc. 69–21 to
the extent they are inconsistent with sec-
tion 167(f), section 197, or the final regu-
lations.
Mortgage Servicing Rights
The proposed regulations treat mort-
gage servicing rights relating to a pool of
mortgages as a single asset under section
167(f) (relating to mortgage servicing
rights not acquired as part of a purchase
of a trade or business). Thus, if some but
not all mortgages in a pool prepay, no loss
is recognized. Commentators assert that
each right in the pool is a discrete asset,
and thus, taxpayers should be able to rec-
ognize a loss upon the prepayment of an
individual mortgage within the pool. The
Service and the Treasury Department be-
lieve this is generally inappropriate in
cases where depreciation is based on the
average useful life of the assets. See
§1.167(a)–8. Thus, the regulations retain
the rule that no loss is recognized if some
but not all mortgages in a pool prepay or
are sold or exchanged. The final regula-
tions provide, however, that if a taxpayer
establishes multiple accounts within a
pool at the time of its acquisition, gain or
loss is recognized on the sale or exchange
of all mortgage servicing rights within
any such account.
When Section 197 Amortization Begins
The proposed regulations provide that
amortization begins the later of the first
day of the month in which the property is
acquired, or the first month in which the
active conduct of a trade or business be-
gins. Commentators suggest that the lit-
eral language of section 197(a) allows
amortization beginning with the month
the intangible is acquired. Under section
197(c)(1), however, a section 197 intangi-
ble is amortizable only if it is held in con-
nection with the conduct of a trade or
business or an activity described in sec-
tion 212. Moreover, there is no sugges-
tion in the legislative history that Con-
gress intended to apply a rule differing
from those applicable under section 167
and former section 1253(d).
Former section 1253(d)(2) provided, in
language similar to that in section 197(a),
that the amortization of certain amounts
begins in the taxable year in which the
amounts are paid. Although section
1253(d)(2) did not contain any reference to
section 162 or to use in a trade or business,
it was nevertheless well established at the
time of the enactment of section 197 that
the provision embodied a trade or business
requirement and that amounts were not de-
ductible thereunder unless the taxpayer
was operating or conducting a trade or
business after the amounts were paid.
Commentators suggest that it is signifi-
cant that section 167 refers to “property
used in the trade or business” while prop-
erty can qualify for amortization under sec-
tion 197 if it is “held in connection with the
conduct of a trade or business.” Further,
commentators assert that the language
used in section 197 is closer to the “held in
connection with his trade or business” lan-
guage used in section 174, which does not
require the current conduct of a trade or
business, than to the language of section
167. The different language used in these
provisions can be explained, however,
without departing from previous practice
under sections 167 and 1253(d) regarding
the time at which amortization com-
mences. Broader language under section
197 is necessary because it applies to as-
sets, such as goodwill, that although held
in connection with the conduct of a trade
or business are not commonly viewed as
being used in the trade or business. Fur-
ther, modifying the language used in sec-
tion 174 by adding the words “conduct of”
indicates that Congress did not intend to
change the longstanding trade or business
requirement for purposes of determining
when amortization commences.

2000–7 I.R.B.591February 14, 2000
Consequently, the final regulations re-
tain the rule in the proposed regulations
that amortization begins no earlier than
the first day of the month in which the ac-
tive trade or business or the activity de-
scribed in section 212 begins.
Transactions Involving Partnerships
The final regulations relating to part-
nership transactions have been changed
from the proposed regulations in several
respects to reflect the recommendations
of commentators. Example 17of the pro-
posed regulation § 1.197-2(k) provided
that a partner may amortize a § 743 ad-
justment with respect to a section 197 in-
tangible only if the formation of the part-
nership and the sale of the partnership
interest are “unrelated transactions.”
Commentators suggested that an unre-
lated transaction standard would create
significant confusion for taxpayers. Ac-
cording to the commentators, taxpayers
would have greater certainty with respect
to their transactions, and the government
still would be adequately protected, if
these transactions were analyzed under
general tax principles, including the step
transaction doctrine. The final regulations
remove the unrelated transaction require-
ment. However, if the transaction is
structured so that, under general princi-
ples of tax law, the transaction is not
properly characterized as a sale of a part-
nership interest, then section 197 will
apply to the transaction as recast to reflect
its true economic substance.
Certain commentators also requested
that Example 16of proposed regulation §
1.197–2(k) be modified to allow a part-
nership to amortize an intangible con-
tributed to the partnership under the
transferred basis rules under section
197(f)(2), even if a partner related to the
partnership under section 197(f)(9)(C)
had owned the intangible during the tran-
sition period and, as part of an integrated
transaction, had sold the intangible to an
unrelated party before forming the part-
nership. The commentators suggested
that because section 197(f)(9)(E) gener-
ally permits amortization for the stepped-
up basis in a partnership transaction
under section 743 where a section 754
election was in effect, amortization also
should be allowed in a sale of an intangi-
ble followed by a contribution of the in-
tangible to a partnership, an economi-
cally similar transaction. This recom-
mendation was not adopted. In general, a
partnership is treated as an entity separate
from its partners in characterizing related
party transfers. See, e.g., Section
707(b)(1) (specifically referenced in sec-
tion 197(f)(9)(C)(i)(I)). Section
197(f)(9)(E) does provide a special anti-
churning rule for certain partnership
transactions. However, this special rule
is not applicable in situations where a
partnership has a transferred basis in the
intangible under section 723. With re-
spect to the analogy under section 743,
where a transferee is allowed to amortize
a section 743 basis step-up, it is only the
increase in basis that may be amortized,
and the amortization attributable to the
basis increase is segregated for use only
by the transferee partner. Neither of
these results necessarily follow from a
sale of property followed by a contribu-
tion of the property to the partnership.
The proposed regulations did not allow
partners to deduct, for federal income tax
purposes, curative or remedial amortiza-
tion allocations from the partnership in
situations where the asset was a section
197(f)(9) intangible (and thus nonamorti-
zable) in the hands of the contributing
partner. Commentators have suggested
allowing curative and remedial alloca-
tions under section 704(c). The final reg-
ulations generally permit a partnership to
make curative or remedial allocations to
its noncontributing partners of amortiza-
tion relating to an asset that was amortiz-
able (or a zero-basis intangible that other-
wise would have been amortizable) in the
hands of the contributor. For assets that
were section 197(f)(9) intangibles (and
thus nonamortizable) in the hands of the
contributor, however, the partnership may
make deductible amortization allocations
to the noncontributing partners under the
remedial method only. The final regula-
tions permit remedial allocations because,
under section 704(c), remedial allocations
treat the amortizable portion of con-
tributed property like newly purchased
property, with a new holding period and
determinable allocation of tax items. This
result, which is similar to the result ob-
tained for basis increases under section
743, does not follow under the curative
method because curative allocations are
not determined as if the applicable prop-
erty were newly purchased property. The
decision to allow amortization for reme-
dial allocations in these regulations also is
consistent with the decisions regarding
fungibility of partnership interests that are
inherent in the recently finalized regula-
tions under sections 743 and 755. Finally,
the rules governing section 704(c) alloca-
tions of amortization from section 197 in-
tangibles contributed to a partnership in a
nonrecognition transaction are still sub-
ject to the anti-churning provisions. Ac-
cordingly, remedial allocations of de-
ductible amortization expenses may not
be made to a partner who is related to a
partner that contributes an intangible sub-
ject to the anti-churning rules. Certain
problems may arise in maintaining capital
accounts where a partnership elects to
make remedial allocations, and the anti-
churning rules apply with respect to one
or more partners. These problems also
arise in the context of section 734(b) ad-
justments and are discussed in the pream-
ble to the proposed regulations relating to
the application of the anti-churning rules
to basis adjustments under sections
732(b) and 734(b), which are being issued
at the same date as these final regulations.
Commentators requested that the final
regulations provide additional guidance
on how the special anti-churning rule of
section 197(f)(9)(E) applies to increases
in the basis of property under sections
732, 734, and 743. In accordance with
these comments, the final regulations pro-
vide rules for determining the amount of a
basis adjustment under sections 732(d)
and 743 that will be subject to the anti-
churning rules. The Treasury Department
and the IRS also are issuing, at the same
time as these final regulations, proposed
regulations addressing how to determine
the amount of a basis adjustment under
sections 732(b) and 734(b) that will be
subject to the anti-churning rules.
Finally, the final regulations provide
that where, for purposes of the anti-churn-
ing rules, a partner is treated as holding its
proportionate share of partnership prop-
erty under section 197(f)(9)(E), the con-
tinued or subsequent use (by license or
otherwise) of an intangible by a partner
could cause the anti-churning rules to
apply with respect to that partner’s share
of the intangible in situations where a
basis step-up under section 732(d) or
743(b) otherwise would be amortizable.

February 14, 20005922000–7 I.R.B.
This rule is necessary in order to prevent
the circumvention of section 197(f)(9)(A)
through the use of a partnership. The pro-
posed regulations being issued in conjunc-
tion with these final regulations expand
the application of this rule to basis adjust-
ments under sections 732(b) and 734(b).
Contracts for the Use of a Section 197
Intangible
The proposed regulations provide that
a right to use a section 197 intangible
pursuant to a license, contract, or other
arrangement is, itself, a section 197 in-
tangible. The proposed regulations fur-
ther provide that amounts paid for such a
right are chargeable to capital account,
whether or not the payments would have
been deductible (for example, as a roy-
alty) if the right were not a section 197
intangible. Under the proposed regula-
tions, the amount chargeable to capital
account is generally determined without
regard to sections 483 and 1274 (that is,
no part of the amount paid is recharacter-
ized as unstated interest or original issue
discount). Finally, the proposed regula-
tions treat the acquisition of a franchise,
trademark, or trade name as the acquisi-
tion of a trade or business, thereby pre-
venting other intangibles acquired in the
same transaction or series of related
transactions from qualifying for any of
the exceptions applicable to separately
acquired property.
Commentators suggested that these
rules have negative consequences for
common cross-border and affiliate li-
censes, which frequently include, in addi-
tion to rights that would not be subject to
section 197 if not acquired as part of a
purchase of a trade or business, rights to
use a trademark or trade name. Under
prior law, amounts paid for these licenses
were generally currently deductible. The
proposed regulations, however, require
amortization over 15 years. In addition,
cost recovery over the 15-year period is
significantly backloaded because the li-
censes generally involve contingent pay-
ments that are not includible in basis until
the year in which they are paid or in-
curred and, in addition, the proposed reg-
ulations provide that sections 483 and
1274 are generally inapplicable.
After further consideration of this
issue in light of the concerns raised by
the commentators, the IRS and Treasury
Department have concluded that, particu-
larly in the case of common licensing
transactions involving technology and
similar intangible property, a different
approach is appropriate. The clearest in-
dication of Congressional intent on this
issue is the statement in the legislative
history to the effect that, with certain ex-
ceptions, section 197 generally does not
apply to amounts that were otherwise
currently deductible before the enactment
of section 197. Nevertheless, the IRS
and Treasury Department are also mind-
ful that Congress directed the issuance of
such regulations as may be appropriate to
prevent avoidance of the purposes of sec-
tion 197.
The final regulations generally provide
that royalty payments under a contract for
the use of section 197 intangibles uncon-
nected with the purchase of a trade or
business are not required to be capital-
ized. Licensing transactions will, how-
ever, be closely scrutinized under the
principles of section 1235 for purposes of
determining whether the payments are, in
fact, deductible royalties or, instead, rep-
resent purchase price that should be
charged to capital account.
The final regulations also modify the
rule that treats the acquisition of a fran-
chise, trademark, or trade name as the ac-
quisition of a trade or business. Under the
final regulations, the acquisition of an in-
terest in a trademark or trade name is dis-
regarded in determining whether acquired
property is a trade or business if, under
the principles of section 1253, the grant of
the interest is not a transfer of all substan-
tial rights in the trademark or trade name.
Thus, the acquisition of such an interest in
a trademark or trade name will not subject
other intangibles acquired in the same
transaction or series of related transac-
tions to the generally less favorable rules
applicable to intangibles acquired as part
of a purchase of a trade or business.
To prevent abuses, the final regulations
provide that if the right to use a section
197 intangible is provided under a license
entered into as part of a purchase of a
trade or business, amounts paid for the
right are, as under the proposed regula-
tions, chargeable to capital account. An
exception, not contained in the proposed
regulations, is provided for licenses of
technology, know-how, and other similar
items (including most types of informa-
tion base). Royalties paid under these li-
censes are not required to be capitalized if
the taxpayer establishes that the payments
are, in fact, deductible royalties under
general tax principles and represent an
arm’s-length consideration for the trans-
ferred rights.
Finally, any amount otherwise charge-
able to capital account with respect to a
section 197 intangible and payable after
the acquisition of the intangible to which
it relates is treated, in determining the tax
treatment of the purchaser, as an amount
payable under a debt instrument. Thus,
the extent to which such amounts are
treated as payments of principal and the
time at which the amount treated as prin-
cipal is included in basis is determined
under generally applicable rules relating
to imputed interest and original issue dis-
count. If, under these rules, a basis in-
crease occurs after the beginning of the
15-year amortization period, the increase
is amortized over the remainder of the 15-
year period (or, in the case of an increase
occurring after the end of the amortization
period, is immediately deductible).
Anti-churning Rules
The anti-churning rules of section 197
prevent taxpayers from converting good-
will, going concern value, and similar as-
sets held or used at any time during the
transition period into amortizable section
197 intangibles through transactions such
as transfers to related parties. The pro-
posed regulations provide guidance on a
number of specific issues arising under
the anti-churning rules. The final regula-
tions retain this guidance with certain
modifications and, in addition, set forth
the purpose of the anti-churning rules
(generally, to prevent the amortization of
certain intangibles that are not acquired
after the applicable effective date in a
transaction giving rise to a significant
change in ownership or use). The final
regulations further provide that the anti-
churning rules are to be applied in a man-
ner that carries out their purpose. The
final regulations include a rule providing
that a transaction will be presumed to
have a principal purpose of avoiding the
anti-churning rules if it does not effect a
significant change in ownership or use.
The final regulations also provide addi-

2000–7 I.R.B.593February 14, 2000
tional guidance concerning the circum-
stances in which persons are treated as re-
lated for purposes of the anti-churning
rules. Section 197 provides that a rela-
tionship is tested for purposes of the anti-
churning rules both immediately before
and immediately after the acquisition.
The proposed regulations further provide
that, in the case of intangibles acquired in
a series of related transactions, testing be-
gins immediately before the first acquisi-
tion and continues until immediately after
the last acquisition. Comments suggested
that momentary relationships created in
the course of the acquisition should be dis-
regarded for purposes of the anti-churning
rules. Such relationships can arise, for ex-
ample, in the course of a stock acquisition
followed by a liquidation or when assets
are contributed to a newly created sub-
sidiary and, pursuant to a binding commit-
ment, all stock of the subsidiary is sold to
an unrelated person or persons immedi-
ately after the contribution.
To address these and similar situations,
the final regulations provide that in the
case of a series of related transactions (or
a series of transactions that together com-
prise a qualified stock purchase within the
meaning of section 338(d)(3)) a person is
treated as related to another person if the
relationship exists immediately before the
earliest such transaction or immediately
after the last such transaction. In addi-
tion, any relationship created as part of a
series of related transactions in which a
person acquires stock of a corporation fol-
lowed by a liquidation of the acquired
corporation under section 331 generally is
disregarded. Further, as with all other
provisions of the regulations relating to
the anti-churning rules, these provisions
are to be applied in a manner that carries
out the purpose of the anti-churning rules.
The final regulations also provide guid-
ance on the exemption from the anti-
churning rules if the person from whom
the taxpayer acquires an intangible elects
to recognize gain and agrees to pay a
specified amount of tax. In general, these
rules are the same as those contained in
the proposed regulations, except that the
proposed regulations do not prescribe
procedures for making the election. The
final regulations provide guidance on the
manner of making the election, including
procedures that apply to persons not oth-
erwise subject to Federal income tax.
Effective Dates
The regulations under sections 167(f)
and 197 were proposed to apply on the
date on which the final regulations are
published in the Federal Register(Janu-
ary 25, 2000). Regulations to implement
section 197(e)(4)(D) (separately acquired
contracts of fixed duration or amount)
were proposed to apply August 11, 1993,
for property acquired after August 10,
1993 (or July 26, 1991, if a valid retroac-
tive election has been made under
§1.197–1T). Comments suggested that
the applicability date should be modified
to clarify that the regulations (other than
the implementation of section
197(e)(4)(D)) apply only to property ac-
quired on or after the date final regula-
tions are published. This suggestion has
been adopted. Accordingly, the final reg-
ulations generally apply only to intangible
property acquired after January 25, 2000.
The applicability date of the rules im-
plementing section 197(e)(4)(D) is simi-
larly clarified. Thus, the final regulations
provide that these rules apply to property
acquired after August 10, 1993 (or July
25, 1991, if a valid retroactive election
has been made under §1.197–1T). The
regulations also provide consent for
changes in method of accounting to com-
ply with the rules and automatic proce-
dures for making the change.
In addition, the final regulations permit
taxpayers to apply the rules in the final
regulations to property acquired before
the applicability date of the final regula-
tions (or to rely on the proposed regula-
tions for such property) and provide simi-
lar consent and automatic change
procedures for taxpayers that choose to
apply the final regulations to pre-effective
date acquisitions.
Special Analyses
It has been determined that this Trea-
sury decision is not a significant regula-
tory action as defined in Executive Order
12866. Therefore, a regulatory assess-
ment is not required. It is hereby certified
that these regulations do not have a signif-
icant impact on a substantial number of
small entities. This certification is based
on the fact that the time required to pre-
pare and file the election statement and
notify acquirers is minimal and will not
have a significant impact on those few
small entities that choose to make the elec-
tion. Therefore, a Regulatory Flexibility
Analysis under the Regulatory Flexibility
Act (5 U.S.C. chapter 6) is not required. It
also has been determined that section
553(b) of the Administrative Procedure
Act (5 U.S.C. chapter 5) does not apply to
these regulations. Pursuant to section
7805(f) of the Internal Revenue Code, the
notice of proposed rulemaking was sub-
mitted to the Chief Counsel for Advocacy
of the Small Business Administration for
comment on its impact on small business.
Drafting Information
The principal author of these regula-
tions is John Huffman, Office of Assistant
Chief Counsel (Passthroughs and Special
Industries), IRS. However, other person-
nel from the IRS and Treasury Depart-
ment participated in their development.
* * * * *
Amendments to the Regulations
Accordingly, 26 CFR parts 1 and 602
are amended as follows:
PART 1—INCOME TAXES
Paragraph 1. The authority citation for
part 1 is amended by adding an entry in
numerical order to read as follows:
Authority: 26 U.S.C. 7805 * * *
Section 1.197–2 also issued under 26
U.S.C. 197(g). * * *
Par. 2. Section 1.162–11 is amended
by adding a sentence at the end of para-
graph (a) to read as follows:
§1.162–11 Rentals.
(a) * * * See §1.197–2 for rules gov-
erning the amortization of costs to acquire
limited interests in section 197 intangi-
bles.
* * * * *
Par. 3. Section 1.167(a)–3 is amended
by adding a sentence at the end to read as
follows:
§1.167(a)–3 Intangibles.
* * * See sections 197 and 167(f) and, to
the extent applicable, §§1.197–2 and
1.167(a)–14 for amortization of goodwill
and certain other intangibles acquired
after August 10, 1993, or after July 25,
1991, if a valid retroactive election under
§1.197–1T has been made.
Par. 4. Section 1.167(a)–6 is amended
by adding two sentences at the end of
paragraph (a) to read as follows:

February 14, 20005942000–7 I.R.B.
§1.167(a)–6 Depreciation in special
cases.
(a) * * * See §1.167(a)–14(c)(4) for de-
preciation of a separately acquired inter-
est in a patent or copyright described in
section 167(f)(2) acquired after January
25, 2000. See §1.197–2 for amortization
of interests in patents and copyrights that
constitute amortizable section 197 intan-
gibles.
* * * * *
Par. 5. Section 1.167(a)–14 is added to
read as follows:
§1.167(a)–14 Treatment of certain intan-
gible property excluded from section 197.
(a) Overview. This section provides
rules for the amortization of certain intan-
gibles that are excluded from section 197
(relating to the amortization of goodwill
and certain other intangibles). These ex-
cluded intangibles are specifically de-
scribed in §1.197–2(c)(4), (6), (7), (11),
and (13) and include certain computer
software and certain other separately ac-
quired rights, such as rights to receive
tangible property or services, patents and
copyrights, certain mortgage servicing
rights, and rights of fixed duration or
amount. Intangibles for which an amorti-
zation amount is determined under sec-
tion 167(f) and intangibles otherwise ex-
cluded from section 197 are amortizable
only if they qualify as property subject to
the allowance for depreciation under sec-
tion 167(a).
(b) Computer software—(1) In general.
The amount of the deduction for com-
puter software described in section
167(f)(1) and §1.197–2(c)(4) is deter-
mined by amortizing the cost or other
basis of the computer software using the
straight line method described in
§1.167(b)–1 (except that its salvage value
is treated as zero) and an amortization pe-
riod of 36 months beginning on the first
day of the month that the computer soft-
ware is placed in service. If costs for de-
veloping computer software that the tax-
payer properly elects to defer under
section 174(b) result in the development
of property subject to the allowance for
depreciation under section 167, the rules
of this paragraph (b) will apply to the un-
recovered costs. In addition, this para-
graph (b) applies to the cost of separately
acquired computer software where these
costs are separately stated and the costs
are required to be capitalized under sec-
tion 263(a).
(2) Exceptions.Paragraph (b)(1) of
this section does not apply to the cost of
computer software properly and consis-
tently taken into account under
§1.162–11. The cost of acquiring an in-
terest in computer software that is in-
cluded, without being separately stated, in
the cost of the hardware or other tangible
property is treated as part of the cost of
the hardware or other tangible property
that is capitalized and depreciated under
other applicable sections of the Internal
Revenue Code.
(3) Additional rules. Rules similar to
those in §1.197–2(f)(1)(iii), (f)(1)(iv), and
(f)(2) (relating to the computation of
amortization deductions and the treatment
of contingent amounts) apply for pur-
poses of this paragraph (b).
(c) Certain interests or rights not ac-
quired as part of a purchase of a trade or
business—(1) Certain rights to receive
tangible property or services. The
amount of the deduction for a right (other
than a right acquired as part of a purchase
of a trade or business) to receive tangible
property or services under a contract or
from a governmental unit (as specified in
section 167(f)(2) and §1.197–2(c)(6)) is
determined as follows:
(i) Amortization of fixed amounts. The
basis of a right to receive a fixed amount
of tangible property or services is amor-
tized for each taxable year by multiplying
the basis of the right by a fraction, the nu-
merator of which is the amount of tangi-
ble property or services received during
the taxable year and the denominator of
which is the total amount of tangible
property or services received or to be re-
ceived under the terms of the contract or
governmental grant. For example, if a
taxpayer acquires a favorable contract
right to receive a fixed amount of raw ma-
terials during an unspecified period, the
taxpayer must amortize the cost of acquir-
ing the contract right by multiplying the
total cost by a fraction, the numerator of
which is the amount of raw materials re-
ceived under the contract during the tax-
able year and the denominator of which is
the total amount of raw materials received
or to be received under the contract.
(ii) Amortization of unspecified amount
over fixed period. The cost or other basis
of a right to receive an unspecified
amount of tangible property or services
over a fixed period is amortized ratably
over the period of the right. (See para-
graph (c)(3) of this section regarding re-
newals).
(iii) Amortization in other cases. [Re-
served]
(2) Rights of fixed duration or amount.
The amount of the deduction for a right
(other than a right acquired as part of a
purchase of a trade or business) of fixed
duration or amount received under a con-
tract or granted by a governmental unit
(specified in section 167(f)(2) and
§1.197–2(c)(13)) and not covered by
paragraph (c)(1) of this section is deter-
mined as follows:
(i) Rights to a fixed amount.The basis
of a right to a fixed amount is amortized
for each taxable year by multiplying the
basis by a fraction, the numerator of
which is the amount received during the
taxable year and the denominator of
which is the total amount received or to
be received under the terms of the con-
tract or governmental grant.
(ii) Rights to an unspecified amount
over fixed duration of less than 15 years.
The basis of a right to an unspecified
amount over a fixed duration of less than
15 years is amortized ratably over the pe-
riod of the right.
(3) Application of renewals.(i) For
purposes of paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of
this section, the duration of a right under a
contract (or granted by a governmental
unit) includes any renewal period if,
based on all of the facts and circum-
stances in existence at any time during the
taxable year in which the right is ac-
quired, the facts clearly indicate a reason-
able expectancy of renewal.
(ii) The mere fact that a taxpayer will
have the opportunity to renew a contract
right or other right on the same terms as
are available to others, in a competitive
auction or similar process that is designed
to reflect fair market value and in which
the taxpayer is not contractually advan-
taged, will generally not be taken into ac-
count in determining the duration of such
right provided that the bidding produces a
fair market value price comparable to the
price that would be obtained if the rights
were purchased immediately after re-
newal from a person (other than the per-
son granting the renewal) in an arm’s-
length transaction.
(iii) The cost of a renewal not included

2000–7 I.R.B.595February 14, 2000
in the terms of the contract or governmen-
tal grant is treated as the acquisition of a
separate intangible asset.
(4) Patents and copyrights.If the pur-
chase price of a interest (other than an in-
terest acquired as part of a purchase of a
trade or business) in a patent or copyright
described in section 167(f)(2) and
§1.197–2(c)(7) is payable on at least an
annual basis as either a fixed amount per
use or a fixed percentage of the revenue
derived from the use of the patent or
copyright, the depreciation deduction for
a taxable year is equal to the amount of
the purchase price paid or incurred during
the year. Otherwise, the basis of such
patent or copyright (or an interest therein)
is depreciated either ratably over its re-
maining useful life or under section
167(g) (income forecast method). If a
patent or copyright becomes valueless in
any year before its legal expiration, the
adjusted basis may be deducted in that
year.
(5) Additional rules. The period of
amortization under paragraphs (c)(1)
through (4) of this section begins when
the intangible is placed in service, and
rules similar to those in §1.197–2(f)(2)
apply for purposes of this paragraph (c).
(d) Mortgage servicing rights—(1) In
general.The amount of the deduction for
mortgage servicing rights described in
section 167(f)(3) and §1.197–2(c)(11) is
determined by using the straight line
method described in §1.167(b)–1 (except
that the salvage value is treated as zero)
and an amortization period of 108 months
beginning on the first day of the month
that the rights are placed in service.
Mortgage servicing rights are not depre-
ciable to the extent the rights are stripped
coupons under section 1286.
(2) Treatment of rights acquired as a
pool—(i) In general.Except as provided
in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this section, all
mortgage servicing rights acquired in the
same transaction or in a series of related
transactions are treated as a single asset
(the pool) for purposes of determining the
depreciation deduction under this para-
graph (d) and any gain or loss from the
sale, exchange, or other disposition of the
rights. Thus, if some (but not all) of the
rights in a pool become worthless as a re-
sult of prepayments, no loss is recognized
by reason of the prepayment and the ad-
justed basis of the pool is not affected by
the unrecognized loss. Similarly, any
amount realized from the sale or ex-
change of some (but not all) of the mort-
gage servicing rights is included in in-
come and the adjusted basis of the pool is
not affected by the realization.
(ii) Multiple accounts. If the taxpayer
establishes multiple accounts within a
pool at the time of its acquisition, gain or
loss is recognized on the sale or exchange
of all mortgage servicing rights within
any such account.
(3) Additional rules. Rules similar to
those in §1.197–2(f)(1)(iii), (f)(1)(iv), and
(f)(2) (relating to the computation of
amortization deductions and the treatment
of contingent amounts) apply for pur-
poses of this paragraph (d).
(e) Effective date— (1) In general.
This section applies to property acquired
after January 25, 2000, except that
§1.167(a)–14(c)(2) (depreciation of the
cost of certain separately acquired rights)
and so much of §1.167(a)–14(c)(3) as re-
lates to §1.167(a)–14(c)(2) apply to prop-
erty acquired after August 10, 1993 (or
July 25, 1991, if a valid retroactive elec-
tion has been made under §1.197–1T).
(2) Change in method of accounting.
See §1.197–2(l)(4) for rules relating to
changes in method of accounting for
property to which §1.167(a)–14 applies.
Par. 6. Section 1.197–0 is added to
read as follows:
§1.197–0 Table of contents.
This section lists the headings that ap-
pear in §1.197–2.
§1.197–2 Amortization of goodwill
and certain other intangibles.
(a) Overview.
(1) In general.
(2) Section 167(f) property.
(3) Amounts otherwise deductible.
(b) Section 197 intangibles; in general.
(1) Goodwill.
(2) Going concern value.
(3) Workforce in place.
(4) Information base.
(5) Know-how, etc.
(6) Customer-based intangibles.
(7) Supplier-based intangibles.
(8) Licenses, permits, and other rights
granted by governmental units.
(9) Covenants not to compete and other
similar arrangements.
(10) Franchises, trademarks, and trade
names.
(11) Contracts for the use of, and term in-
terests in, other section 197 intangibles.
(12) Other similar items.
(c) Section 197 intangibles; exceptions.
(1) Interests in a corporation, partnership,
trust, or estate.
(2) Interests under certain financial con-
tracts.
(3) Interests in land.
(4) Certain computer software.
(i) Publicly available.
(ii) Not acquired as part of trade or busi-
ness.
(iii) Other exceptions.
(iv) Computer software defined.
(5) Certain interests in films, sound
recordings, video tapes, books, or other
similar property.
(6) Certain rights to receive tangible prop-
erty or services.
(7) Certain interests in patents or copy-
rights.
(8) Interests under leases of tangible prop-
erty.
(i) Interest as a lessor.
(ii) Interest as a lessee.
(9) Interests under indebtedness.
(i) In general.
(ii) Exceptions.
(10) Professional sports franchises.
(11) Mortgage servicing rights.
(12) Certain transaction costs.
(13) Rights of fixed duration or amount.
(d) Amortizable section 197 intangibles.
(1) Definition.
(2) Exception for self-created intangibles.
(i) In general.
(ii) Created by the taxpayer.
(A) Defined.
(B) Contracts for the use of intangibles.
(C) Improvements and modifications.
(iii) Exceptions.
(3) Exception for property subject to anti-
churning rules.
(e) Purchase of a trade or business.
(1) Goodwill or going concern value.
(2) Franchise, trademark, or trade name.
(i) In general.
(ii) Exceptions.
(3) Acquisitions to be included.
(4) Substantial portion.
(5) Deemed asset purchases under section
338.
(6) Mortgage servicing rights.
(7) Computer software acquired for inter-
nal use.
(f) Computation of amortization deduc-
tion.
(1) In general.

February 14, 20005962000–7 I.R.B.
(2) Treatment of contingent amounts.
(i) Amounts added to basis during 15-year
period.
(ii) Amounts becoming fixed after expira-
tion of 15-year period.
(iii) Rules for including amounts in basis.
(3) Basis determinations for certain as-
sets.
(i) Covenants not to compete.
(ii) Contracts for the use of section 197
intangibles; acquired as part of a trade or
business.
(A) In general.
(B) Know-how and certain information
base.
(iii) Contracts for the use of section 197
intangibles; not acquired as part of a trade
or business.
(iv) Applicable rules.
(A) Franchises, trademarks, and trade
names.
(B) Certain amounts treated as payable
under a debt instrument.
(1) In general.
(2) Rights granted by governmental units.
(3) Treatment of other parties to transac-
tion.
(4) Basis determinations in certain trans-
actions.
(i
) Certain renewal transactions.
(ii) Transactions subject to section 338 or
1060.
(iii) Certain reinsurance transactions.
(g) Special rules.
(1) Treatment of certain dispositions.
(i) Loss disallowance rules.
(A) In general.
(B) Abandonment or worthlessness.
(C) Certain nonrecognition transfers.
(ii) Separately acquired property.
(iii) Disposition of a covenant not to com-
pete.
(iv) Taxpayers under common control.
(A) In general.
(B) Treatment of disallowed loss.
(2) Treatment of certain nonrecognition
and exchange transactions.
(i) Relationship to anti-churning rules.
(ii) Treatment of nonrecognition and ex-
change transactions generally.
(A) Transfer disregarded.
(B) Application of general rule.
(C) Transactions covered.
(iii) Certain exchanged-basis property.
(iv) Transfers under section 708(b)(1).
(A) In general.
(B) Termination by sale or exchange of
interest.
(C) Other terminations.
(3) Increase in the basis of partnership
property under section 732(b), 734(b),
743(b), or 732(d).
(4) Section 704(c) allocations.
(i) Allocations where the intangible is
amortizable by the contributor.
(ii) Allocations where the intangible is not
amortizable by the contributor.
(5) Treatment of certain reinsurance trans-
actions.
(i) In general.
(ii) Determination of adjusted basis.
(A) Acquisitions (other than under section
338) of specified insurance contracts.
(B) Insolvent ceding company
(C) Other acquisitions. [Reserved]
(6) Amounts paid or incurred for a fran-
chise, trademark, or trade name.
(7) Amounts properly taken into account
in determining the cost of property that is
not a section 197 intangible.
(8) Treatment of amortizable section 197
intangibles as depreciable property.
(h) Anti-churning rules.
(1) Scope and purpose.
(i) Scope.
(ii) Purpose.
(2) Treatment of section 197(f)(9) intangi-
bles.
(3) Amounts deductible under section
1253(d) or §1.162–11.
(4) Transition period.
(5) Exceptions.
(6) Related person.
(i) In general.
(ii) Time for testing relationships.
(iii) Certain relationships disregarded.
(iv) De minimis rule.
(A) In general.
(B) Determination of beneficial owner-
ship interest.
(7) Special rules for entities that owned or
used property at any time during the tran-
sition period and that are no longer in ex-
istence.
(8) Special rules for section 338 deemed
acquisitions.
(9) Gain-recognition exception.
(i) Applicability.
(ii) Effect of exception.
(iii) Time and manner of election.
(iv) Special rules for certain entities.
(v) Effect of nonconforming elections.
(vi) Notification requirements.
(vii) Revocation.
(viii) Election Statement.
(ix) Determination of highest marginal
rate of tax and amount of other Federal in-
come tax on gain.
(A) Marginal rate.
(1) Noncorporate taxpayers.
(2) Corporations and tax-exempt entities.
(B) Other Federal income tax on gain.
(x) Coordination with other provisions.
(A) In general.
(B) Section 1374.
(C) Procedural and administrative provi-
sions.
(D) Installment method.
(xi) Special rules for persons not other-
wise subject to Federal income tax.
(10) Transactions subject to both anti-
churning and nonrecognition rules.
(11) Avoidance purpose.
(12) Additional partnership anti-churning
rules
(i) In general.
(ii) Section 732(b) adjustments. [Re-
served]
(iii) Section 732(d) adjustments.
(iv) Section 734(b) adjustments. [Re-
served]
(v) Section 743(b) adjustments.
(vi) Partner is or becomes a user of part-
nership intangible.
(A) General rule.
(B) Anti-churning partner.
(C) Effect of retroactive elections.
(vii) Section 704(c) elections.
(A) Allocations where the intangible is
amortizable by the contributor.
(B) Allocations where the intangible is
not amortizable by the contributor.
(viii) Operating rule for transfers upon
death.
(i) Reserved
(j) General anti-abuse rule.
(k) Examples.
(l) Effective dates.
(1) In general.
(2) Application to pre-effective date ac-
quisitions.
(3) Application of regulation project
REG–209709–94 to pre-effective date ac-
quisitions.
(4) Change in method of accounting.
(i) In general.
(ii) Application to pre-effective date
transactions.
(iii) Automatic change procedures.
Par. 7. Section 1.197–2 is added to
read as follows:
§1.197–2 Amortization of goodwill and
certain other intangibles.
(a) Overview—(1) In general. Section

197 allows an amortization deduction for
the capitalized costs of an amortizable
section 197 intangible and prohibits any
other depreciation or amortization with
respect to that property. Paragraphs (b),
(c), and (e) of this section provide rules
and definitions for determining whether
property is a section 197 intangible, and
paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section pro-
vide rules and definitions for determining
whether a section 197 intangible is an
amortizable section 197 intangible. The
amortization deduction under section 197
is determined by amortizing basis ratably
over a 15-year period under the rules of
paragraph (f) of this section. Section 197
also includes various special rules per-
taining to the disposition of amortizable
section 197 intangibles, nonrecognition
transactions, anti-churning rules, and anti-
abuse rules. Rules relating to these provi-
sions are contained in paragraphs (g), (h),
and (j) of this section. Examples demon-
strating the application of these provi-
sions are contained in paragraph (k) of
this section. The effective date of the
rules in this section is contained in para-
graph (l) of this section.
(2) Section 167(f) property.Section
167(f) prescribes rules for computing the
depreciation deduction for certain property
to which section 197 does not apply. See
§1.167(a)–14 for rules under section 167(f)
and paragraphs (c)(4), (6), (7), (11), and
(13) of this section for a description of the
property subject to section 167(f).
(3) Amounts otherwise deductible.
Section 197 does not apply to amounts
that are not chargeable to capital account
under paragraph (f)(3) (relating to basis
determinations for covenants not to com-
pete and certain contracts for the use of
section 197 intangibles) of this section
and are otherwise currently deductible.
For this purpose, an amount described in
§1.162–11 is not currently deductible if,
without regard to §1.162–11, such
amount is properly chargeable to capital
account.
(b) Section 197 intangibles; in general.
Except as otherwise provided in para-
graph (c) of this section, the term section
197 intangiblemeans any property de-
scribed in section 197(d)(1). The follow-
ing rules and definitions provide guidance
concerning property that is a section 197
intangible unless an exception applies:
(1) Goodwill. Section 197 intangibles
include goodwill. Goodwill is the value
of a trade or business attributable to the
expectancy of continued customer patron-
age. This expectancy may be due to the
name or reputation of a trade or business
or any other factor.
(2) Going concern value. Section 197
intangibles include going concern value.
Going concern value is the additional
value that attaches to property by reason
of its existence as an integral part of an
ongoing business activity. Going concern
value includes the value attributable to the
ability of a trade or business (or a part of a
trade or business) to continue functioning
or generating income without interruption
notwithstanding a change in ownership,
but does not include any of the intangibles
described in any other provision of this
paragraph (b). It also includes the value
that is attributable to the immediate use or
availability of an acquired trade or busi-
ness, such as, for example, the use of the
revenues or net earnings that otherwise
would not be received during any period
if the acquired trade or business were not
available or operational.
(3) Workforce in place. Section 197 in-
tangibles include workforce in place.
Workforce in place (sometimes referred
to as agency force or assembled work-
force) includes the composition of a
workforce (for example, the experience,
education, or training of a workforce), the
terms and conditions of employment
whether contractual or otherwise, and any
other value placed on employees or any of
their attributes. Thus, the amount paid or
incurred for workforce in place includes,
for example, any portion of the purchase
price of an acquired trade or business at-
tributable to the existence of a highly-
skilled workforce, an existing employ-
ment contract (or contracts), or a
relationship with employees or consul-
tants (including, but not limited to, any
key employee contract or relationship).
Workforce in place does not include any
covenant not to compete or other similar
arrangement described in paragraph
(b)(9) of this section.
(4) Information base. Section 197 in-
tangibles include any information base,
including a customer-related information
base. For this purpose, an information
base includes business books and records,
operating systems, and any other informa-
tion base (regardless of the method of
recording the information) and a cus-
tomer-related information base is any in-
formation base that includes lists or other
information with respect to current or
prospective customers. Thus, the amount
paid or incurred for information base in-
cludes, for example, any portion of the
purchase price of an acquired trade or
business attributable to the intangible
value of technical manuals, training man-
uals or programs, data files, and account-
ing or inventory control systems. Other
examples include the cost of acquiring
customer lists, subscription lists, insur-
ance expirations, patient or client files, or
lists of newspaper, magazine, radio, or
television advertisers.
(5) Know-how, etc. Section 197 intan-
gibles include any patent, copyright, for-
mula, process, design, pattern, know-how,
format, package design, computer soft-
ware (as defined in paragraph (c)(4)(iv) of
this section), or interest in a film, sound
recording, video tape, book, or other simi-
lar property. (See, however, the excep-
tions in paragraph (c) of this section.)
(6) Customer-based intangibles. Sec-
tion 197 intangibles include any cus-
tomer- based intangible. A customer-
based intangible is any composition of
market, market share, or other value re-
sulting from the future provision of goods
or services pursuant to contractual or
other relationships in the ordinary course
of business with customers. Thus, the
amount paid or incurred for customer-
based intangibles includes, for example,
any portion of the purchase price of an ac-
quired trade or business attributable to the
existence of a customer base, a circulation
base, an undeveloped market or market
growth, insurance in force, the existence
of a qualification to supply goods or ser-
vices to a particular customer, a mortgage
servicing contract (as defined in para-
graph (c)(11) of this section), an invest-
ment management contract, or other rela-
tionship with customers involving the
future provision of goods or services.
(See, however, the exceptions in para-
graph (c) of this section.) In addition,
customer-based intangibles include the
deposit base and any similar asset of a fi-
nancial institution. Thus, the amount paid
or incurred for customer-based intangi-
bles also includes any portion of the pur-
chase price of an acquired financial insti-
tution attributable to the value represented
2000–7 I.R.B.597February 14, 2000

by existing checking accounts, savings
accounts, escrow accounts, and other sim-
ilar items of the financial institution.
However, any portion of the purchase
price of an acquired trade or business at-
tributable to accounts receivable or other
similar rights to income for goods or ser-
vices provided to customers prior to the
acquisition of a trade or business is not an
amount paid or incurred for a customer-
based intangible.
(7) Supplier-based intangibles. Section
197 intangibles include any supplier-
based intangible. A supplier-based intan-
gible is the value resulting from the future
acquisition, pursuant to contractual or
other relationships with suppliers in the
ordinary course of business, of goods or
services that will be sold or used by the
taxpayer. Thus, the amount paid or in-
curred for supplier-based intangibles in-
cludes, for example, any portion of the
purchase price of an acquired trade or
business attributable to the existence of a
favorable relationship with persons pro-
viding distribution services (such as fa-
vorable shelf or display space at a retail
outlet), the existence of a favorable credit
rating, or the existence of favorable sup-
ply contracts. The amount paid or in-
curred for supplier-based intangibles does
not include any amount required to be
paid for the goods or services themselves
pursuant to the terms of the agreement or
other relationship. In addition, see the ex-
ceptions in paragraph (c) of this section,
including the exception in paragraph
(c)(6) of this section for certain rights to
receive tangible property or services from
another person.
(8) Licenses, permits, and other rights
granted by governmental units. Section
197 intangibles include any license, per-
mit, or other right granted by a govern-
mental unit (including, for purposes of
section 197, an agency or instrumentality
thereof) even if the right is granted for an
indefinite period or is reasonably ex-
pected to be renewed for an indefinite pe-
riod. These rights include, for example, a
liquor license, a taxi-cab medallion (or li-
cense), an airport landing or takeoff right
(sometimes referred to as a slot), a regu-
lated airline route, or a television or radio
broadcasting license. The issuance or re-
newal of a license, permit, or other right
granted by a governmental unit is consid-
ered an acquisition of the license, permit,
or other right. (See, however, the excep-
tions in paragraph (c) of this section, in-
cluding the exceptions in paragraph (c)(3)
of this section for an interest in land, para-
graph (c)(6) of this section for certain
rights to receive tangible property or ser-
vices, paragraph (c)(8) of this section for
an interest under a lease of tangible prop-
erty, and paragraph (c)(13) of this section
for certain rights granted by a governmen-
tal unit. See paragraph (b)(10) of this sec-
tion for the treatment of franchises.)
(9) Covenants not to compete and other
similar arrangements.Section 197 intan-
gibles include any covenant not to com-
pete, or agreement having substantially
the same effect, entered into in connection
with the direct or indirect acquisition of
an interest in a trade or business or a sub-
stantial portion thereof. For purposes of
this paragraph (b)(9), an acquisition may
be made in the form of an asset acquisi-
tion (including a qualified stock purchase
that is treated as a purchase of assets
under section 338), a stock acquisition or
redemption, and the acquisition or re-
demption of a partnership interest. An
agreement requiring the performance of
services for the acquiring taxpayer or the
provision of property or its use to the ac-
quiring taxpayer does not have substan-
tially the same effect as a covenant not to
compete to the extent that the amount
paid under the agreement represents rea-
sonable compensation for the services ac-
tually rendered or for the property or use
of the property actually provided.
(10) Franchises, trademarks, and trade
names. (i) Section 197 intangibles in-
clude any franchise, trademark, or trade
name. The term franchisehas the mean-
ing given in section 1253(b)(1) and in-
cludes any agreement that provides one of
the parties to the agreement with the right
to distribute, sell, or provide goods, ser-
vices, or facilities, within a specified area.
The term trademarkincludes any word,
name, symbol, or device, or any combina-
tion thereof, adopted and used to identify
goods or services and distinguish them
from those provided by others. The term
trade name includes any name used to
identify or designate a particular trade or
business or the name or title used by a
person or organization engaged in a trade
or business. A license, permit, or other
right granted by a governmental unit is a
franchise if it otherwise meets the defini-
tion of a franchise. A trademark or trade
name includes any trademark or trade
name arising under statute or applicable
common law, and any similar right
granted by contract. The renewal of a
franchise, trademark, or trade name is
treated as an acquisition of the franchise,
trademark, or trade name.
(ii) Notwithstanding the definitions
provided in paragraph (b)(10)(i) of this
section, any amount that is paid or in-
curred on account of a transfer, sale, or
other disposition of a franchise, trade-
mark, or trade name and that is subject to
section 1253(d)(1) is not included in the
basis of a section 197 intangible. (See
paragraph (g)(6) of this section.)
(11) Contracts for the use of, and term
interests in, section 197 intangibles. Sec-
tion 197 intangibles include any right
under a license, contract, or other arrange-
ment providing for the use of property
that would be a section 197 intangible
under any provision of this paragraph (b)
(including this paragraph (b)(11)) after
giving effect to all of the exceptions pro-
vided in paragraph (c) of this section.
Section 197 intangibles also include any
term interest (whether outright or in trust)
in such property.
(12) Other similar items. Section 197
intangibles include any other intangible
property that is similar in all material re-
spects to the property specifically de-
scribed in section 197(d)(1)(C)(i) through
(v) and paragraphs (b)(3) through (7) of
this section. (See paragraph (g)(5) of this
section for special rules regarding certain
reinsurance transactions.)
(c) Section 197 intangibles; exceptions.
The term section 197 intangibledoes not
include property described in section
197(e). The following rules and defini-
tions provide guidance concerning prop-
erty to which the exceptions apply:
(1) Interests in a corporation, partner-
ship, trust, or estate. Section 197 intangi-
bles do not include an interest in a corpo-
ration, partnership, trust, or estate. Thus,
for example, amortization under section
197 is not available for the cost of acquir-
ing stock, partnership interests, or inter-
ests in a trust or estate, whether or not the
interests are regularly traded on an estab-
lished market. (See paragraph (g)(3) of
this section for special rules applicable to
property of a partnership when a section
754 election is in effect for the partner-
February 14, 20005982000–7 I.R.B.

2000–7 I.R.B.599February 14, 2000
ship.)
(2) Interests under certain financial
contracts. Section 197 intangibles do not
include an interest under an existing fu-
tures contract, foreign currency contract,
notional principal contract, interest rate
swap, or other similar financial contract,
whether or not the interest is regularly
traded on an established market. How-
ever, this exception does not apply to an
interest under a mortgage servicing con-
tract, credit card servicing contract, or
other contract to service another person’s
indebtedness, or an interest under an as-
sumption reinsurance contract. (See para-
graph (g)(5) of this section for the treat-
ment of assumption reinsurance contracts.
See paragraph (c)(11) of this section and
§1.167(a)–14(d) for the treatment of
mortgage servicing rights.)
(3) Interests in land. Section 197 intan-
gibles do not include any interest in land.
For this purpose, an interest in land in-
cludes a fee interest, life estate, remain-
der, easement, mineral right, timber right,
grazing right, riparian right, air right, zon-
ing variance, and any other similar right,
such as a farm allotment, quota for farm
commodities, or crop acreage base. An
interest in land does not include an airport
landing or takeoff right, a regulated air-
line route, or a franchise to provide cable
television service. The cost of acquiring a
license, permit, or other land improve-
ment right, such as a building construc-
tion or use permit, is taken into account in
the same manner as the underlying im-
provement.
(4) Certain computer software—(i)
Publicly available. Section 197 intangi-
bles do not include any interest in com-
puter software that is (or has been) readily
available to the general public on similar
terms, is subject to a nonexclusive li-
cense, and has not been substantially
modified. Computer software will be
treated as readily available to the general
public if the software may be obtained on
substantially the same terms by a signifi-
cant number of persons that would rea-
sonably be expected to use the software.
This requirement can be met even though
the software is not available through a
system of retail distribution. Computer
software will not be considered to have
been substantially modified if the cost of
all modifications to the version of the
software that is readily available to the
general public does not exceed the greater
of 25 percent of the price at which the un-
modified version of the software is read-
ily available to the general public or
$2,000. For the purpose of determining
whether computer software has been sub-
stantially modified—
(A) Integrated programs acquired in a
package from a single source are treated
as a single computer program; and
(B) Any cost incurred to install the
computer software on a system is not
treated as a cost of the software. How-
ever, the costs for customization, such as
tailoring to a user’s specifications (other
than embedded programming options) are
costs of modifying the software.
(ii) Not acquired as part of trade or
business. Section 197 intangibles do not
include an interest in computer software
that is not acquired as part of a purchase
of a trade or business.
(iii) Other exceptions. For other excep-
tions applicable to computer software, see
paragraph (a)(3) of this section (relating
to otherwise deductible amounts) and
paragraph (g)(7) of this section (relating
to amounts properly taken into account in
determining the cost of property that is
not a section 197 intangible).
(iv) Computer software defined. For
purposes of this section, computer soft-
ware is any program or routine (that is,
any sequence of machine-readable code)
that is designed to cause a computer to
perform a desired function or set of func-
tions, and the documentation required to
describe and maintain that program or
routine. It includes all forms and media
in which the software is contained,
whether written, magnetic, or otherwise.
Computer programs of all classes, for ex-
ample, operating systems, executive sys-
tems, monitors, compilers and translators,
assembly routines, and utility programs as
well as application programs, are in-
cluded. Computer software also includes
any incidental and ancillary rights that are
necessary to effect the acquisition of the
title to, the ownership of, or the right to
use the computer software, and that are
used only in connection with that specific
computer software. Such incidental and
ancillary rights are not included in the de-
finition of trademark or trade name under
paragraph (b)(10)(i) of this section. For
example, a trademark or trade name that
is ancillary to the ownership or use of a
specific computer software program in
the taxpayer’s trade or business and is not
acquired for the purpose of marketing the
computer software is included in the defi-
nition of computer software and is not in-
cluded in the definition of trademark or
trade name. Computer software does not
include any data or information base de-
scribed in paragraph (b)(4) of this section
unless the data base or item is in the pub-
lic domain and is incidental to a computer
program. For this purpose, a copyrighted
or proprietary data or information base is
treated as in the public domain if its avail-
ability through the computer program
does not contribute significantly to the
cost of the program. For example, if a
word-processing program includes a dic-
tionary feature used to spell-check a doc-
ument or any portion thereof, the entire
program (including the dictionary feature)
is computer software regardless of the
form in which the feature is maintained or
stored.
(5) Certain interests in films, sound
recordings, video tapes, books, or other
similar property. Section 197 intangibles
do not include any interest (including an
interest as a licensee) in a film, sound
recording, video tape, book, or other simi-
lar property (such as the right to broadcast
or transmit a live event) if the interest is
not acquired as part of a purchase of a
trade or business. A film, sound record-
ing, video tape, book, or other similar
property includes any incidental and an-
cillary rights (such as a trademark or trade
name) that are necessary to effect the ac-
quisition of title to, the ownership of, or
the right to use the property and are used
only in connection with that property.
Such incidental and ancillary rights are
not included in the definition of trade-
mark or trade name under paragraph
(b)(10)(i) of this section. For purposes of
this paragraph (c)(5), computer software
(as defined in paragraph (c)(4)(iv) of this
section) is not treated as other property
similar to a film, sound recording, video
tape, or book. (See section 167 for amor-
tization of excluded intangible property or
interests.)
(6) Certain rights to receive tangible
property or services.
Section 197 intangibles do not include
any right to receive tangible property or
services under a contract or from a gov-
ernmental unit if the right is not acquired

February 14, 20006002000–7 I.R.B.
as part of a purchase of a trade or busi-
ness. Any right that is described in the
preceding sentence is not treated as a sec-
tion 197 intangible even though the right
is also described in section 197(d)(1)(D)
and paragraph (b)(8) of this section (relat-
ing to certain governmental licenses, per-
mits, and other rights) and even though
the right fails to meet one or more of the
requirements of paragraph (c)(13) of this
section (relating to certain rights of fixed
duration or amount). (See
§1.167(a)–14(c)(1) and (3) for applicable
rules.)
(7) Certain interests in patents or copy-
rights. Section 197 intangibles do not in-
clude any interest (including an interest as
a licensee) in a patent, patent application,
or copyright that is not acquired as part of
a purchase of a trade or business. A
patent or copyright includes any inciden-
tal and ancillary rights (such as a trade-
mark or trade name) that are necessary to
effect the acquisition of title to, the own-
ership of, or the right to use the property
and are used only in connection with that
property. Such incidental and ancillary
rights are not included in the definition of
trademark or trade name under paragraph
(b)(10)(i) of this section. (See
§1.167(a)–14(c)(4) for applicable rules.)
(8) Interests under leases of tangible
property—(i) Interest as a lessor.Section
197 intangibles do not include any inter-
est as a lessor under an existing lease or
sublease of tangible real or personal prop-
erty. In addition, the cost of acquiring an
interest as a lessor in connection with the
acquisition of tangible property is taken
into account as part of the cost of the tan-
gible property. For example, if a taxpayer
acquires a shopping center that is leased
to tenants operating retail stores, any por-
tion of the purchase price attributable to
favorable lease terms is taken into ac-
count as part of the basis of the shopping
center and in determining the depreciation
deduction allowed with respect to the
shopping center. (See section 167(c)(2).)
(ii) Interest as a lessee. Section 197 in-
tangibles do not include any interest as a
lessee under an existing lease of tangible
real or personal property. For this pur-
pose, an airline lease of an airport passen-
ger or cargo gate is a lease of tangible
property. The cost of acquiring such an
interest is taken into account under sec-
tion 178 and §1.162–11(a). If an interest
as a lessee under a lease of tangible prop-
erty is acquired in a transaction with any
other intangible property, a portion of the
total purchase price may be allocable to
the interest as a lessee based on all of the
relevant facts and circumstances.
(9) Interests under indebtedness—(i) In
general. Section 197 intangibles do not
include any interest (whether as a creditor
or debtor) under an indebtedness in exis-
tence when the interest was acquired.
Thus, for example, the value attributable
to the assumption of an indebtedness with
a below-market interest rate is not amorti-
zable under section 197. In addition, the
premium paid for acquiring a debt instru-
ment with an above-market interest rate is
not amortizable under section 197. See
section 171 for rules concerning the treat-
ment of amortizable bond premium.
(ii) Exceptions. For purposes of this
paragraph (c)(9), an interest under an ex-
isting indebtedness does not include the
deposit base (and other similar items) of a
financial institution. An interest under an
existing indebtedness includes mortgage
servicing rights, however, to the extent
the rights are stripped coupons under sec-
tion 1286.
(10) Professional sports franchises.
Section 197 intangibles do not include
any franchise to engage in professional
baseball, basketball, football, or any other
professional sport, and any item (even
though otherwise qualifying as a section
197 intangible) acquired in connection
with such a franchise.
(11) Mortgage servicing rights.Sec-
tion 197 intangibles do not include any
right described in section 197(e)(7) (con-
cerning rights to service indebtedness se-
cured by residential real property that are
not acquired as part of a purchase of a
trade or business). (See §1.167(a)–14(d)
for applicable rules.)
(12) Certain transaction costs. Section
197 intangibles do not include any fees
for professional services and any transac-
tion costs incurred by parties to a transac-
tion in which all or any portion of the gain
or loss is not recognized under part III of
subchapter C of the Internal Revenue
Code.
(13) Rights of fixed duration or
amount. (i) Section 197 intangibles do
not include any right under a contract or
any license, permit, or other right granted
by a governmental unit if the right—
(A) Is acquired in the ordinary course
of a trade or business (or an activity de-
scribed in section 212) and not as part of a
purchase of a trade or business;
(B) Is not described in section
197(d)(1)(A), (B), (E), or (F);
(C) Is not a customer-based intangible,
a customer-related information base, or
any other similar item; and
(D) Either—
(1) Has a fixed duration of less than 15
years; or
(2) Is fixed as to amount and the ad-
justed basis thereof is properly recover-
able (without regard to this section) under
a method similar to the unit-of-production
method.
(ii) See §1.167(a)–14(c)(2) and (3) for
applicable rules.
(d) Amortizable section 197 intangi-
bles—(1) Definition. Except as otherwise
provided in this paragraph (d), the term
amortizable section 197 intangiblemeans
any section 197 intangible acquired after
August 10, 1993 (or after July 25, 1991, if
a valid retroactive election under
§1.197–1T has been made), and held in
connection with the conduct of a trade or
business or an activity described in sec-
tion 212.
(2) Exception for self-created intangi-
bles—(i) In general. Except as provided
in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this section,
amortizable section 197 intangibles do
not include any section 197 intangible
created by the taxpayer (a self-created in-
tangible).
(ii) Created by the taxpayer—(A) De-
fined. A section 197 intangible is created
by the taxpayer to the extent the taxpayer
makes payments or otherwise incurs costs
for its creation, production, development,
or improvement, whether the actual work
is performed by the taxpayer or by an-
other person under a contract with the tax-
payer entered into before the contracted
creation, production, development, or im-
provement occurs. For example, a tech-
nological process developed specifically
for a taxpayer under an arrangement with
another person pursuant to which the tax-
payer retains all rights to the process is
created by the taxpayer.
(B)Contracts for the use of
intangibles. A section 197 intangible is
not a self- created intangible to the extent
that it results from the entry into (or re-
newal of) a contract for the use of an ex-

isting section 197 intangible. Thus, for
example, the exception for self-created
intangibles does not apply to capitalized
costs, such as legal and other professional
fees, incurred by a licensee in connection
with the entry into (or renewal of) a con-
tract for the use of know-how or similar
property.
(C) Improvements and modifications.
If an existing section 197 intangible is im-
proved or otherwise modified by the tax-
payer or by another person under a con-
tract with the taxpayer, the existing
intangible and the capitalized costs (if
any) of the improvements or other modifi-
cations are each treated as a separate sec-
tion 197 intangible for purposes of this
paragraph (d).
(iii) Exceptions. (A) The exception for
self-created intangibles does not apply to
any section 197 intangible described in
section 197(d)(1)(D) (relating to licenses,
permits or other rights granted by a gov-
ernmental unit), 197(d)(1)(E) (relating to
covenants not to compete), or
197(d)(1)(F) (relating to franchises, trade-
marks, and trade names). Thus, for exam-
ple, capitalized costs incurred in the de-
velopment, registration, or defense of a
trademark or trade name do not qualify
for the exception and are amortized over
15 years under section 197.
(B) The exception for self-created in-
tangibles does not apply to any section
197 intangible created in connection with
the purchase of a trade or business (as de-
fined in paragraph (e) of this section).
(C) If a taxpayer disposes of a self-cre-
ated intangible and subsequently reac-
quires the intangible in an acquisition de-
scribed in paragraph (h)(5)(ii) of this
section, the exception for self-created in-
tangibles does not apply to the reacquired
intangible.
(3) Exception for property subject to
anti-churning rules. Amortizable section
197 intangibles do not include any prop-
erty to which the anti-churning rules of
section 197(f)(9) and paragraph (h) of this
section apply.
(e) Purchase of a trade or business.
Several of the exceptions in section 197
apply only to property that is not acquired
in (or created in connection with) a trans-
action or series of related transactions in-
volving the acquisition of assets constitut-
ing a trade or business or a substantial
portion thereof. Property acquired in (or
created in connection with) such a trans-
action or series of related transactions is
referred to in this section as property ac-
quired as part of (or created in connection
with) a purchase of a trade or business.
For purposes of section 197 and this sec-
tion, the applicability of the limitation is
determined under the following rules:
(1) Goodwill or going concern value.
An asset or group of assets constitutes a
trade or business or a substantial portion
thereof if their use would constitute a
trade or business under section 1060 (that
is, if goodwill or going concern value
could under any circumstances attach to
the assets). See §1.1060–1T(b)(2). For
this purpose, all the facts and circum-
stances, including any employee relation-
ships that continue (or covenants not to
compete that are entered into) as part of
the transfer of the assets, are taken into
account in determining whether goodwill
or going concern value could attach to the
assets.
(2) Franchise, trademark, or trade
name—(i) In general.The acquisition of
a franchise, trademark, or trade name con-
stitutes the acquisition of a trade or busi-
ness or a substantial portion thereof.
(ii) Exceptions. For purposes of this
paragraph (e)(2)—
(A) A trademark or trade name is disre-
garded if it is included in computer soft-
ware under paragraph (c)(4) of this sec-
tion or in an interest in a film, sound
recording, video tape, book, or other simi-
lar property under paragraph (c)(5) of this
section;
(B) A franchise, trademark, or trade
name is disregarded if its value is nominal
or the taxpayer irrevocably disposes of it
immediately after its acquisition; and
(C) The acquisition of a right or interest
in a trademark or trade name is disre-
garded if the grant of the right or interest
is not, under the principles of section
1253, a transfer of all substantial rights to
such property or of an undivided interest
in all substantial rights to such property.
(3) Acquisitions to be included. The
assets acquired in a transaction (or series
of related transactions) include only as-
sets (including a beneficial or other indi-
rect interest in assets where the interest is
of a type described in paragraph (c)(1) of
this section) acquired by the taxpayer and
persons related to the taxpayer from an-
other person and persons related to that
other person. For purposes of this para-
graph (e)(3), persons are related only if
their relationship is described in section
267(b) or 707(b) or they are engaged in
trades or businesses under common con-
trol within the meaning of section
41(f)(1).
(4) Substantial portion.The determi-
nation of whether acquired assets consti-
tute a substantial portion of a trade or
business is to be based on all of the facts
and circumstances, including the nature
and the amount of the assets acquired as
well as the nature and amount of the as-
sets retained by the transferor. The value
of the assets acquired relative to the value
of the assets retained by the transferor is
not determinative of whether the acquired
assets constitute a substantial portion of a
trade or business.
(5) Deemed asset purchases under sec-
tion 338.A qualified stock purchase that
is treated as a purchase of assets under
section 338 is treated as a transaction in-
volving the acquisition of assets constitut-
ing a trade or business only if the direct
acquisition of the assets of the corporation
would have been treated as the acquisition
of assets constituting a trade or business
or a substantial portion thereof.
(6) Mortgage servicing rights. Mort-
gage servicing rights acquired in a trans-
action or series of related transactions are
disregarded in determining for purposes
of paragraph (c)(11) of this section
whether the assets acquired in the transac-
tion or transactions constitute a trade or
business or substantial portion thereof.
(7) Computer software acquired for in-
ternal use.Computer software acquired
in a transaction or series of related trans-
actions solely for internal use in an exist-
ing trade or business is disregarded in de-
termining for purposes of paragraph
(c)(4) of this section whether the assets
acquired in the transaction or series of re-
lated transactions constitute a trade or
business or substantial portion thereof.
(f) Computation of amortization deduc-
tion—(1) In general. Except as provided
in paragraph (f)(2) of this section, the
amortization deduction allowable under
section 197(a) is computed as follows:
(i) The basis of an amortizable section
197 intangible is amortized ratably over
the 15-year period beginning on the later
of—
(A) The first day of the month in which
2000–7 I.R.B.601February 14, 2000

the property is acquired; or
(B) In the case of property held in con-
nection with the conduct of a trade or
business or in an activity described in sec-
tion 212, the first day of the month in
which the conduct of the trade or business
or the activity begins.
(ii) Except as otherwise provided in
this section, basis is determined under
section 1011 and salvage value is disre-
garded.
(iii) Property is not eligible for amorti-
zation in the month of disposition.
(iv) The amortization deduction for a
short taxable year is based on the number
of months in the short taxable year.
(2) Treatment of contingent amounts—
(i) Amounts added to basis during 15-
year period. Any amount that is properly
included in the basis of an amortizable
section 197 intangible after the first
month of the 15-year period described in
paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section and be-
fore the expiration of that period is amor-
tized ratably over the remainder of the 15-
year period. For this purpose, the
remainder of the 15-year period begins on
the first day of the month in which the
basis increase occurs.
(ii) Amounts becoming fixed after expi-
ration of 15-year period.Any amount
that is not properly included in the basis
of an amortizable section 197 intangible
until after the expiration of the 15-year
period described in paragraph (f)(1)(i) of
this section is amortized in full immedi-
ately upon the inclusion of the amount in
the basis of the intangible.
(iii) Rules for including amounts in
basis.See §§1.1275–4(c)(4) and
1.483–4(a) for rules governing the extent
to which contingent amounts payable
under a debt instrument given in consider-
ation for the sale or exchange of an amor-
tizable section 197 intangible are treated
as payments of principal and the time at
which the amount treated as principal is
included in basis. See §1.461–1(a)(1) and
(2) for rules governing the time at which
other contingent amounts are taken into
account in determining the basis of an
amortizable section 197 intangible.
(3) Basis determinations for certain as-
sets—(i) Covenants not to compete. In
the case of a covenant not to compete or
other similar arrangement described in
paragraph (b)(9) of this section (a
covenant), the amount chargeable to capi-
tal account includes, except as provided
in this paragraph (f)(3), all amounts that
are required to be paid pursuant to the
covenant, whether or not any such
amount would be deductible under sec-
tion 162 if the covenant were not a section
197 intangible.
(ii) Contracts for the use of section 197
intangibles; acquired as part of a trade or
business—(A) In general. Except as pro-
vided in this paragraph (f)(3), any amount
paid or incurred by the transferee on ac-
count of the transfer of a right or term in-
terest described in paragraph (b)(11) of
this section (relating to contracts for the
use of, and term interests in, section 197
intangibles) by the owner of the property
to which such right or interest relates and
as part of a purchase of a trade or business
is chargeable to capital account, whether
or not such amount would be deductible
under section 162 if the property were not
a section 197 intangible.
(B) Know-how and certain information
base. The amount chargeable to capital
account with respect to a right or term in-
terest described in paragraph (b)(11) of
this section is determined without regard
to the rule in paragraph (f)(3)(ii)(A) of
this section if the right or interest relates
to property (other than a customer-related
information base) described in paragraph
(b)(4) or (5) of this section and the acquir-
ing taxpayer establishes that—
(1) The transfer of the right or interest
is not, under the principles of section
1235, a transfer of all substantial rights to
such property or of an undivided interest
in all substantial rights to such property;
and
(2) The right or interest was transferred
for an arm’s-length consideration.
(iii) Contracts for the use of section
197 intangibles; not acquired as part of a
trade or business. The transfer of a right
or term interest described in paragraph
(b)(11) of this section by the owner of the
property to which such right or interest re-
lates but not as part of a purchase of a
trade or business will be closely scruti-
nized under the principles of section 1235
for purposes of determining whether the
transfer is a sale or exchange and, accord-
ingly, whether amounts paid on account
of the transfer are chargeable to capital
account. If under the principles of section
1235 the transaction is not a sale or ex-
change, amounts paid on account of the
transfer are not chargeable to capital ac-
count under this paragraph (f)(3).
(iv) Applicable rules—(A) Franchises,
trademarks, and trade names. For pur-
poses of this paragraph (f)(3), section 197
intangibles described in paragraph (b)(11)
of this section do not include any property
that is also described in paragraph (b)(10)
of this section (relating to franchises,
trademarks, and trade names).
(B) Certain amounts treated as payable
under a debt instrument—(1) In general.
For purposes of applying any provision of
the Internal Revenue Code to a person
making payments of amounts that are oth-
erwise chargeable to capital account
under this paragraph (f)(3) and are
payable after the acquisition of the section
197 intangible to which they relate, such
amounts are treated as payable under a
debt instrument given in consideration for
the sale or exchange of the section 197 in-
tangible.
(2) Rights granted by governmental
units. For purposes of applying any pro-
vision of the Internal Revenue Code to
any amounts that are otherwise charge-
able to capital account with respect to a li-
cense, permit, or other right described in
paragraph (b)(8) of this section (relating
to rights granted by a governmental unit
or agency or instrumentality thereof) and
are payable after the acquisition of the
section 197 intangible to which they re-
late, such amounts are treated, except as
provided in paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this sec-
tion (relating to renewal transactions), as
payable under a debt instrument given in
consideration for the sale or exchange of
the section 197 intangible.
(3) Treatment of other parties to trans-
action. No person shall be treated as hav-
ing sold, exchanged, or otherwise dis-
posed of property in a transaction for
purposes of any provision of the Internal
Revenue Code solely by reason of the ap-
plication of this paragraph (f)(3) to any
other party to the transaction.
(4) Basis determinations in certain
transactions—(i
) Certain renewal trans-
actions. The costs paid or incurred for the
renewal of a franchise, trademark, or
trade name or any license, permit, or other
right granted by a governmental unit or an
agency or instrumentality thereof are
amortized over the 15-year period that be-
gins with the month of renewal. Any
costs paid or incurred for the issuance, or
February 14, 20006022000–7 I.R.B.

earlier renewal, continue to be taken into
account over the remaining portion of the
amortization period that began at the time
of the issuance, or earlier renewal. Any
amount paid or incurred for the protec-
tion, expansion, or defense of a trademark
or trade name and chargeable to capital
account is treated as an amount paid or in-
curred for a renewal.
(ii) Transactions subject to section 338
or 1060. In the case of a section 197 in-
tangible deemed to have been acquired as
the result of a qualified stock purchase
within the meaning of section 338(d)(3),
the basis shall be determined pursuant to
section 338(b)(5) and the regulations
thereunder. In the case of a section 197
intangible acquired in an applicable asset
acquisition within the meaning of section
1060(c), the basis shall be determined
pursuant to section 1060(a) and the regu-
lations thereunder.
(iii) Certain reinsurance transactions.
See paragraph (g)(5)(ii) of this section for
special rules regarding the adjusted basis
of an insurance contract acquired through
an assumption reinsurance transaction.
(g) Special rules—(1) Treatment of
certain dispositions—(i) Loss disal-
lowance rules—(A) In general. No loss
is recognized on the disposition of an
amortizable section 197 intangible if the
taxpayer has any retained intangibles.
The retained intangibles with respect to
the disposition of any amortizable section
197 intangible (the transferred intangible)
are all amortizable section 197 intangi-
bles, or rights to use or interests (includ-
ing beneficial or other indirect interests)
in amortizable section 197 intangibles (in-
cluding the transferred intangible) that
were acquired in the same transaction or
series of related transactions as the trans-
ferred intangible and are retained after its
disposition. Except as otherwise pro-
vided in paragraph (g)(1)(iv)(B) of this
section, the adjusted basis of each of the
retained intangibles is increased by the
product of—
(1) The loss that is not recognized
solely by reason of this rule; and
(2) A fraction, the numerator of which
is the adjusted basis of the retained intan-
gible on the date of the disposition and the
denominator of which is the total adjusted
bases of all the retained intangibles on
that date.
(B) Abandonment or worthlessness.
The abandonment of an amortizable sec-
tion 197 intangible, or any other event
rendering an amortizable section 197 in-
tangible worthless, is treated as a disposi-
tion of the intangible for purposes of this
paragraph (g)(1), and the abandoned or
worthless intangible is disregarded (that
is, it is not treated as a retained intangible)
for purposes of applying this paragraph
(g)(1) to the subsequent disposition of any
other amortizable section 197 intangible.
(C) Certain nonrecognition transfers.
The loss disallowance rule in paragraph
(g)(1)(i)(A) of this section also applies
when a taxpayer transfers an amortizable
section 197 intangible from an acquired
trade or business in a transaction in which
the intangible is transferred basis property
and, after the transfer, retains other amor-
tizable section 197 intangibles from the
trade or business. Thus, for example, the
transfer of an amortizable section 197 in-
tangible to a corporation in exchange for
stock in the corporation in a transaction
described in section 351, or to a partner-
ship in exchange for an interest in the
partnership in a transaction described in
section 721, when other amortizable sec-
tion 197 intangibles acquired in the same
transaction are retained, followed by a
sale of the stock or partnership interest re-
ceived, will not avoid the application of
the loss disallowance provision to the ex-
tent the adjusted basis of the transferred
intangible at the time of the sale exceeds
its fair market value at that time.
(ii) Separately acquired property.
Paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section does
not apply to an amortizable section 197
intangible that is not acquired in a trans-
action or series of related transactions in
which the taxpayer acquires other amorti-
zable section 197 intangibles (a separately
acquired intangible). Consequently, a
loss may be recognized upon the disposi-
tion of a separately acquired amortizable
section 197 intangible. However, the ter-
mination or worthlessness of only a por-
tion of an amortizable section 197 intan-
gible is not the disposition of a separately
acquired intangible. For example, neither
the loss of several customers from an ac-
quired customer list nor the worthlessness
of only some information from an ac-
quired data base constitutes the disposi-
tion of a separately acquired intangible.
(iii) Disposition of a covenant not to
compete. If a covenant not to compete or
any other arrangement having substan-
tially the same effect is entered into in
connection with the direct or indirect ac-
quisition of an interest in one or more
trades or businesses, the disposition or
worthlessness of the covenant or other
arrangement will not be considered to
occur until the disposition or worthless-
ness of all interests in those trades or busi-
nesses. For example, a covenant not to
compete entered into in connection with
the purchase of stock continues to be
amortized ratably over the 15-year recov-
ery period (even after the covenant ex-
pires or becomes worthless) unless all the
trades or businesses in which an interest
was acquired through the stock purchase
(or all the purchaser’s interests in those
trades or businesses) also are disposed of
or become worthless.
(iv) Taxpayers under common
control—(A) In general.Except as pro-
vided in paragraph (g)(1)(iv)(B) of this
section, all persons that would be treated
as a single taxpayer under section 41(f)(1)
are treated as a single taxpayer under this
paragraph (g)(1). Thus, for example, a
loss is not recognized on the disposition
of an amortizable section 197 intangible
by a member of a controlled group of cor-
porations (as defined in section 41(f)(5))
if, after the disposition, another member
retains other amortizable section 197 in-
tangibles acquired in the same transaction
as the amortizable section 197 intangible
that has been disposed of.
(B) Treatment of disallowed loss. If re-
tained intangibles are held by a person
other than the person incurring the disal-
lowed loss, only the adjusted basis of in-
tangibles retained by the person incurring
the disallowed loss is increased, and only
the adjusted basis of those intangibles is
included in the denominator of the frac-
tion described in paragraph (g)(1)(i)(A) of
this section. If none of the retained intan-
gibles are held by the person incurring the
disallowed loss, the loss is allowed rat-
ably, as a deduction under section 197,
over the remainder of the period during
which the intangible giving rise to the loss
would have been amortizable, except that
any remaining disallowed loss is allowed
in full on the first date on which all other
retained intangibles have been disposed
of or become worthless.
(2) Treatment of certain nonrecognition
and exchange transactions—(i) Relation-
2000–7 I.R.B.603February 14, 2000

ship to anti-churning rules. This para-
graph (g)(2) provides rules relating to the
treatment of section 197 intangibles ac-
quired in certain transactions. If these
rules apply to a section 197(f)(9) intangi-
ble (within the meaning of paragraph
(h)(1)(i) of this section), the intangible is,
notwithstanding its treatment under this
paragraph (g)(2), treated as an amortiz-
able section 197 intangible only to the ex-
tent permitted under paragraph (h) of this
section.
(ii) Treatment of nonrecognition and
exchange transactions generally—(A)
Transfer disregarded. If a section 197 in-
tangible is transferred in a transaction de-
scribed in paragraph (g)(2)(ii)(C) of this
section, the transfer is disregarded in de-
termining—
(1) Whether, with respect to so much of
the intangible’s basis in the hands of the
transferee as does not exceed its basis in
the hands of the transferor, the intangible
is an amortizable section 197 intangible;
and
(2) The amount of the deduction under
section 197 with respect to such basis.
(B) Application of general rule. If the
intangible described in paragraph
(g)(2)(ii)(A) of this section was an amor-
tizable section 197 intangible in the hands
of the transferor, the transferee will con-
tinue to amortize its adjusted basis, to the
extent it does not exceed the transferor’s
adjusted basis, ratably over the remainder
of the transferor’s 15-year amortization
period. If the intangible was not an amor-
tizable section 197 intangible in the hands
of the transferor, the transferee’s adjusted
basis, to the extent it does not exceed the
transferor’s adjusted basis, cannot be
amortized under section 197. In either
event, the intangible is treated, with re-
spect to so much of its adjusted basis in
the hands of the transferee as exceeds its
adjusted basis in the hands of the trans-
feror, in the same manner for purposes of
section 197 as an intangible acquired
from the transferor in a transaction that is
not described in paragraph (g)(2)(ii)(C) of
this section. The rules of this paragraph
(g)(2)(ii) also apply to any subsequent
transfers of the intangible in a transaction
described in paragraph (g)(2)(ii)(C) of
this section.
(C) Transactions covered. The transac-
tions described in this paragraph
(g)(2)(ii)(C) are—
(1) Any transaction described in section
332, 351, 361, 721, or 731; and
(2) Any transaction between corpora-
tions that are members of the same con-
solidated group immediately after the
transaction.
(iii) Certain exchanged-basis property.
This paragraph (g)(2)(iii) applies to prop-
erty that is acquired in a transaction sub-
ject to section 1031 or 1033 and is permit-
ted to be acquired without recognition of
gain (replacement property). Replace-
ment property is treated as if it were the
property by reference to which its basis is
determined (the predecessor property) in
determining whether, with respect to so
much of its basis as does not exceed the
basis of the predecessor property, the re-
placement property is an amortizable sec-
tion 197 intangible and the amortization
period under section 197 with respect to
such basis. Thus, if the predecessor prop-
erty was an amortizable section 197 intan-
gible, the taxpayer will amortize the ad-
justed basis of the replacement property,
to the extent it does not exceed the ad-
justed basis of the predecessor property,
ratably over the remainder of the 15-year
amortization period for the predecessor
property. If the predecessor property was
not an amortizable section 197 intangible,
the adjusted basis of the replacement
property, to the extent it does not exceed
the adjusted basis of the predecessor
property, may not be amortized under sec-
tion 197. In either event, the replacement
property is treated, with respect to so
much of its adjusted basis as exceeds the
adjusted basis of the predecessor prop-
erty, in the same manner for purposes of
section 197 as property acquired from the
transferor in a transaction that is not sub-
ject to section 1031 or 1033.
(iv) Transfers under section
708(b)(1)—(A) In general. Paragraph
(g)(2)(ii) of this section applies to trans-
fers of section 197 intangibles that occur
or are deemed to occur by reason of the
termination of a partnership under section
708(b)(1).
(B) Termination by sale or exchange of
interest. In applying paragraph (g)(2)(ii)
of this section to a partnership that is ter-
minated pursuant to section 708(b)(1)(B)
(relating to deemed terminations from the
sale or exchange of an interest), the termi-
nated partnership is treated as the trans-
feror and the new partnership is treated as
the transferee with respect to any section
197 intangible held by the terminated
partnership immediately preceding the
termination. (See paragraph (g)(3) of this
section for the treatment of increases in
the bases of property of the terminated
partnership under section 743(b).)
(C) Other terminations. In applying
paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this section to a
partnership that is terminated pursuant to
section 708(b)(1)(A) (relating to cessation
of activities by a partnership), the termi-
nated partnership is treated as the trans-
feror and the distributee partner is treated
as the transferee with respect to any sec-
tion 197 intangible held by the terminated
partnership immediately preceding the
termination.
(3)Increase in the basis of partnership
property under section 732(b), 734(b),
743(b), or 732(d). Any increase in the ad-
justed basis of a section 197 intangible
under sections 732(b) or 732(d) (relating
to a partner’s basis in property distributed
by a partnership), section 734(b) (relating
to the optional adjustment to the basis of
undistributed partnership property after a
distribution of property to a partner), or
section 743(b) (relating to the optional ad-
justment to the basis of partnership prop-
erty after transfer of a partnership inter-
est) is treated as a separate section 197
intangible. For purposes of determining
the amortization period under section 197
with respect to the basis increase, the in-
tangible is treated as having been ac-
quired at the time of the transaction that
causes the basis increase. The provisions
of paragraph (f)(2) of this section apply to
the extent that the amount of the basis in-
crease is determined by reference to con-
tingent payments. For purposes of the ef-
fective date and anti-churning provisions
(paragraphs (l)(1) and (h) of this section)
for a basis increase under section 732(d),
the intangible is treated as having been
acquired by the transferee partner at the
time of the transfer of the partnership in-
terest described in section 732(d).
(4) Section 704(c) allocations—(i) Al-
locations where the intangible is amortiz-
able by the contributor. To the extent that
the intangible was an amortizable section
197 intangible in the hands of the con-
tributing partner, a partnership may make
allocations of amortization deductions
with respect to the intangible to all of its
partners under either the curative or reme-
February 14, 20006042000–7 I.R.B.

dial allocation methods described in the
regulations under section 704(c). See
§1.704–3(c) and (d).
(ii) Allocations where the intangible is
not amortizable by the contributor.To the
extent that the intangible was not an
amortizable section 197 intangible in the
hands of the contributing partner, the in-
tangible is not amortizable by the partner-
ship. However, if a partner contributes a
section 197 intangible to a partnership
and the partnership adopts the remedial
allocation method for making section
704(c) allocations of amortization deduc-
tions, the partnership generally may make
remedial allocations of amortization de-
ductions with respect to the contributed
section 197 intangible in accordance with
§ 1.704–3(d). See paragraph (h)(12) of
this section to determine the application
of the anti-churning rules in the context of
remedial allocations.
(5) Treatment of certain reinsurance
transactions—(i) In general.Section 197
applies to any insurance contract acquired
from another person through an assump-
tion reinsurance transaction. For pur-
poses of section 197, an assumption rein-
surance transaction is—
(A) Any arrangement in which one in-
surance company (the reinsurer) becomes
solely liable to policyholders on contracts
transferred by another insurance company
(the ceding company); and
(B) Any acquisition of an insurance
contract that is treated as occurring by
reason of an election under section 338.
(ii) Determination of adjusted basis—
(A) Acquisitions (other than under sec-
tion 338) of specified insurance contracts.
The amount taken into account for pur-
poses of section 197 as the adjusted basis
of specified insurance contracts (as de-
fined in section 848(e)(1)) acquired in an
assumption reinsurance transaction that is
not described in paragraph (g)(5)(i)(B) of
this section is equal to the excess of—
(1) The amount paid or incurred (or
treated as having been paid or incurred)
by the reinsurer for the purchase of the
contracts (as determined under
§1.817–4(d)(2)); over
(2) The amount of the specified policy
acquisition expenses that are attributable
to the reinsurer’s net positive considera-
tion for the reinsurance agreement (as de-
termined under §1.848–2(f)(3)).
(B) Insolvent ceding company.The re-
duction of the amount of specified policy
acquisition expenses by the reinsurer with
respect to an assumption reinsurance
transaction with an insolvent ceding com-
pany where the ceding company and rein-
surer have made a valid joint election
under section 1.848–2(i)(4) is disregarded
in determining the amount of specified
policy acquisition expenses for purposes
of this paragraph (g)(5)(ii).
(C) Other acquisitions. [Reserved]
(6) Amounts paid or incurred for a
franchise, trademark, or trade name. If
an amount to which section 1253(d) (re-
lating to the transfer, sale, or other dispo-
sition of a franchise, trademark, or trade
name) applies is described in section
1253(d)(1)(B) (relating to contingent ser-
ial payments deductible under section
162), the amount is not included in the ad-
justed basis of the intangible for purposes
of section 197. Any other amount,
whether fixed or contingent, to which sec-
tion 1253(d) applies is chargeable to capi-
tal account under section 1253(d)(2) and
is amortizable only under section 197.
(7) Amounts properly taken into ac-
count in determining the cost of property
that is not a section 197 intangible. Sec-
tion 197 does not apply to an amount that
is properly taken into account in deter-
mining the cost of property that is not a
section 197 intangible. The entire cost of
acquiring the other property is included in
its basis and recovered under other applic-
able Internal Revenue Code provisions.
Thus, for example, section 197 does not
apply to the cost of an interest in com-
puter software to the extent such cost is
included, without being separately stated,
in the cost of the hardware or other tangi-
ble property and is consistently treated as
part of the cost of the hardware or other
tangible property.
(8) Treatment of amortizable section
197 intangibles as depreciable property.
An amortizable section 197 intangible is
treated as property of a character subject
to the allowance for depreciation under
section 167. Thus, for example, an amor-
tizable section 197 intangible is not a cap-
ital asset for purposes of section 1221, but
if used in a trade or business and held for
more than one year, gain or loss on its dis-
position generally qualifies as section
1231 gain or loss. Also, an amortizable
section 197 intangible is section 1245
property and section 1239 applies to any
gain recognized upon its sale or exchange
between related persons (as defined in
section 1239(b)).
(h) Anti-churning rules—(1) Scope and
purpose—(i) Scope. This paragraph (h)
applies to section 197(f)(9) intangibles.
For this purpose, section 197(f)(9) intan-
gibles are goodwill and going concern
value that was held or used at any time
during the transition period and any other
section 197 intangible that was held or
used at any time during the transition pe-
riod and was not depreciable or amortiz-
able under prior law.
(ii) Purpose. To qualify as an amortiz-
able section 197 intangible, a section 197
intangible must be acquired after the ap-
plicable date (July 25, 1991, if the acquir-
ing taxpayer has made a valid retroactive
election pursuant to §1.197–1T; August
10, 1993, in all other cases). The purpose
of the anti-churning rules of section
197(f)(9) and this paragraph (h) is to pre-
vent the amortization of section 197(f)(9)
intangibles unless they are transferred
after the applicable effective date in a
transaction giving rise to a significant
change in ownership or use. (Special
rules apply for purposes of determining
whether transactions involving partner-
ships give rise to a significant change in
ownership or use. See paragraph (h)(12)
of this section.) The anti-churning rules
are to be applied in a manner that carries
out their purpose.
(2) Treatment of section 197(f)(9) in-
tangibles.Except as otherwise provided
in this paragraph (h), a section 197(f)(9)
intangible acquired by a taxpayer after the
applicable effective date does not qualify
for amortization under section 197 if—
(i) The taxpayer or a related person
held or used the intangible or an interest
therein at any time during the transition
period;
(ii) The taxpayer acquired the intangi-
ble from a person that held the intangible
at any time during the transition period
and, as part of the transaction, the user of
the intangible does not change; or
(iii) The taxpayer grants the right to use
the intangible to a person that held or used
the intangible at any time during the tran-
sition period (or to a person related to that
person), but only if the transaction in
which the taxpayer grants the right and
the transaction in which the taxpayer ac-
quired the intangible are part of a series of
2000–7 I.R.B.605February 14, 2000

related transactions.
(3) Amounts deductible under section
1253(d) or §1.162–11. For purposes of
this paragraph (h), deductions allowable
under section 1253(d)(2) or pursuant to an
election under section 1253(d)(3) (in ei-
ther case as in effect prior to the enact-
ment of section 197) and deductions al-
lowable under §1.162–11 are treated as
deductions allowable for amortization
under prior law.
(4) Transition period. For purposes of
this paragraph (h), the transition period is
July 25, 1991, if the acquiring taxpayer
has made a valid retroactive election pur-
suant to §1.197–1T and the period begin-
ning on July 25, 1991, and ending on Au-
gust 10, 1993, in all other cases.
(5) Exceptions. The anti-churning rules
of this paragraph (h) do not apply to—
(i) The acquisition of a section
197(f)(9) intangible if the acquiring tax-
payer’s basis in the intangible is deter-
mined under section 1014(a); or
(ii) The acquisition of a section
197(f)(9) intangible that was an amortiz-
able section 197 intangible in the hands of
the seller (or transferor), but only if the
acquisition transaction and the transaction
in which the seller (or transferor) acquired
the intangible or interest therein are not
part of a series of related transactions.
(6) Related person—(i) In general.
Except as otherwise provided in para-
graph (h)(6)(ii) of this section, a person is
related to another person for purposes of
this paragraph (h) if—
(A) The person bears a relationship to
that person that would be specified in sec-
tion 267(b) (determined without regard to
section 267(e)) and, by substitution, sec-
tion 267(f)(1), if those sections were
amended by substituting 20 percent for 50
percent; or
(B) The person bears a relationship to
that person that would be specified in sec-
tion 707(b)(1) if that section were
amended by substituting 20 percent for 50
percent; or
(C) The persons are engaged in trades
or businesses under common control
(within the meaning of section
41(f)(1)(A) and (B)).
(ii) Time for testing relationships. Ex-
cept as provided in paragraph (h)(6)(iii)
of this section, a person is treated as re-
lated to another person for purposes of
this paragraph (h) if the relationship ex-
ists—
(A) In the case of a single transaction,
immediately before or immediately after
the transaction in which the intangible is
acquired; and
(B) In the case of a series of related
transactions (or a series of transactions
that together comprise a qualified stock
purchase within the meaning of section
338(d)(3)), immediately before the earli-
est such transaction or immediately after
the last such transaction.
(iii) Certain relationships disregarded.
In applying the rules in paragraph (h)(7)
of this section, if a person acquires an in-
tangible in a series of related transactions
in which the person acquires stock (meet-
ing the requirements of section
1504(a)(2)) of a corporation in a fully tax-
able transaction followed by a liquidation
of the acquired corporation under section
331, any relationship created as part of
such series of transactions is disregarded
in determining whether any person is re-
lated to such acquired corporation imme-
diately after the last transaction.
(iv) De minimis rule—(A) In general.
Two corporations are not treated as re-
lated persons for purposes of this para-
graph (h) if—
(1) The corporations would (but for the
application of this paragraph (h)(6)(iv))
be treated as related persons solely by rea-
son of substituting “more than 20 per-
cent” for “more than 50 percent” in sec-
tion 267(f)(1)(A); and
(2) The beneficial ownership interest of
each corporation in the stock of the other
corporation represents less than 10 percent
of the total combined voting power of all
classes of stock entitled to vote and less
than 10 percent of the total value of the
shares of all classes of stock outstanding.
(B)Determination of beneficial owner-
ship interest. For purposes of this para-
graph (h)(6)(iv), the beneficial ownership
interest of one corporation in the stock of
another corporation is determined under
the principles of section 318(a), except
that—
(1) In applying section 318(a)(2)(C),
the 50-percent limitation contained
therein is not applied; and
(2) Section 318(a)(3)(C) is applied by
substituting “20 percent” for “50 per-
cent”.
(7) Special rules for entities that owned
or used property at any time during the
transition period and that are no longer
in existence.A corporation, partnership,
or trust that owned or used a section 197
intangible at any time during the transi-
tion period and that is no longer in exis-
tence is deemed, for purposes of deter-
mining whether a taxpayer acquiring the
intangible is related to such entity, to be in
existence at the time of the acquisition.
(8) Special rules for section 338
deemed acquisitions. In the case of a
qualified stock purchase that is treated as
a deemed sale and purchase of assets pur-
suant to section 338, the corporation
treated as purchasing assets as a result of
an election thereunder (new target) is not
considered the person that held or used
the assets during any period in which the
assets were held or used by the corpora-
tion treated as selling the assets (old tar-
get). Thus, for example, if a corporation
(the purchasing corporation) makes a
qualified stock purchase of the stock of
another corporation after the transition
period, new target will not be treated as
the owner during the transition period of
assets owned by old target during that pe-
riod even if old target and new target are
treated as the same corporation for certain
other purposes of the Internal Revenue
Code or old target and new target are the
same corporation under the laws of the
State or other jurisdiction of its organiza-
tion. However, the anti-churning rules of
this paragraph (h) may nevertheless apply
to a deemed asset purchase resulting from
a section 338 election if new target is re-
lated (within the meaning of paragraph
(h)(6) of this section) to old target.
(9) Gain-recognition exception—(i)
Applicability.A section 197(f)(9) intangi-
ble qualifies for the gain-recognition ex-
ception if—
(A) The taxpayer acquires the intangi-
ble from a person that would not be re-
lated to the taxpayer but for the substitu-
tion of 20 percent for 50 percent under
paragraph (h)(6)(i)(A) of this section; and
(B) That person (whether or not other-
wise subject to Federal income tax) elects
to recognize gain on the disposition of the
intangible and agrees, notwithstanding
any other provision of law or treaty, to
pay for the taxable year in which the dis-
position occurs an amount of tax on the
gain that, when added to any other Fed-
eral income tax on such gain, equals the
gain on the disposition multiplied by the
February 14, 20006062000–7 I.R.B.

highest marginal rate of tax for that tax-
able year.
(ii) Effect of exception. The anti-churn-
ing rules of this paragraph (h) apply to a
section 197(f)(9) intangible that qualifies
for the gain-recognition exception only to
the extent the acquiring taxpayer’s basis
in the intangible exceeds the gain recog-
nized by the transferor.
(iii) Time and manner of election.The
election described in this paragraph (h)(9)
must be made by the due date (including
extensions of time) of the electing tax-
payer’s Federal income tax return for the
taxable year in which the disposition oc-
curs. The election is made by attaching
an election statement satisfying the re-
quirements of paragraph (h)(9)(viii) of
this section to the electing taxpayer’s
original or amended income tax return for
that taxable year (or by filing the state-
ment as a return for the taxable year under
paragraph (h)(9)(xi) of this section). In
addition, the taxpayer must satisfy the no-
tification requirements of paragraph
(h)(9)(vi) of this section. The election is
binding on the taxpayer and all parties
whose Federal tax liability is affected by
the election.
(iv) Special rules for certain entities.
In the case of a partnership, S corporation,
estate or trust, the election under this
paragraph (h)(9) is made by the entity
rather than by its owners or beneficiaries.
If a partnership or S corporation makes an
election under this paragraph (h)(9) with
respect to the disposition of a section
197(f)(9) intangible, each of its partners
or shareholders is required to pay a tax
determined in the manner described in
paragraph (h)(9)(i)(B) of this section on
the amount of gain that is properly alloca-
ble to such partner or shareholder with re-
spect to the disposition.
(v) Effect of nonconforming elections.
An attempted election that does not sub-
stantially comply with each of the re-
quirements of this paragraph (h)(9) is dis-
regarded in determining whether a section
197(f)(9) intangible qualifies for the gain-
recognition exception.
(vi) Notification requirements. A tax-
payer making an election under this para-
graph (h)(9) with respect to the disposi-
tion of a section 197(f)(9) intangible must
provide written notification of the elec-
tion on or before the due date of the return
on which the election is made to the per-
son acquiring the section 197 intangible.
In addition, a partnership or S corporation
making an election under this paragraph
(h)(9) must attach to the Schedule K-1
furnished to each partner or shareholder a
written statement containing all informa-
tion necessary to determine the recipient’s
additional tax liability under this para-
graph (h)(9).
(vii) Revocation. An election under
this paragraph (h)(9) may be revoked only
with the consent of the Commissioner.
(viii) Election Statement.An election
statement satisfies the requirements of
this paragraph (h)(9)(viii) if it is in writ-
ing and contains the information listed
below. The required information should
be arranged and identified in accordance
with the following order and numbering
system:
(A) The name and address of the elect-
ing taxpayer.
(B) Except in the case of a taxpayer
that is not otherwise subject to Federal in-
come tax, the taxpayer identification
number (TIN) of the electing taxpayer.
(C) A statement that the taxpayer is
making the election under section
197(f)(9)(B).
(D) Identification of the transaction and
each person that is a party to the transac-
tion or whose tax return is affected by the
election (including, except in the case of
persons not otherwise subject to Federal
income tax, the TIN of each such person).
(E) The calculation of the gain realized,
the applicable rate of tax, and the amount
of the taxpayer’s additional tax liability
under this paragraph (h)(9).
(F) The signature of the taxpayer or an
individual authorized to sign the tax-
payer’s Federal income tax return.
(ix) Determination of highest marginal
rate of tax and amount of other Federal
income tax on gain—(A) Marginal rate.
The following rules apply for purposes of
determining the highest marginal rate of
tax applicable to an electing taxpayer:
(1) Noncorporate taxpayers. In the
case of an individual, estate, or trust, the
highest marginal rate of tax is the highest
marginal rate of tax in effect under sec-
tion 1, determined without regard to sec-
tion 1(h).
(2) Corporations and tax-exempt enti-
ties. In the case of a corporation or an en-
tity that is exempt from tax under section
501(a), the highest marginal rate of tax is
the highest marginal rate of tax in effect
under section 11, determined without re-
gard to any rate that is added to the other-
wise applicable rate in order to offset the
effect of the graduated rate schedule.
(B) Other Federal income tax on gain.
The amount of Federal income tax (other
than the tax determined under this para-
graph (h)(9)) imposed on any gain is the
lesser of—
(1) The amount by which the tax-
payer’s Federal income tax liability (de-
termined without regard to this paragraph
(h)(9)) would be reduced if the amount of
such gain were not taken into account; or
(2) The amount of the gain multiplied
by the highest marginal rate of tax for the
taxable year.
(x) Coordination with other
provisions—(A) In general. The amount
of gain subject to the tax determined
under this paragraph (h)(9) is not reduced
by any net operating loss deduction under
section 172(a), any capital loss under sec-
tion 1212, or any other similar loss or de-
duction. In addition, the amount of tax
determined under this paragraph (h)(9) is
not reduced by any credit of the taxpayer.
In computing the amount of any net oper-
ating loss, capital loss, or other similar
loss or deduction, or any credit that may
be carried to any taxable year, any gain
subject to the tax determined under this
paragraph (h)(9) and any tax paid under
this paragraph (h)(9) is not taken into ac-
count.
(B) Section 1374. No provision of
paragraph (h)(9)(iv) of this section pre-
cludes the application of section 1374 (re-
lating to a tax on certain built-in gains of
S corporations) to any gain with respect to
which an election under this paragraph
(h)(9) is made. In addition, neither para-
graph (h)(9)(iv) nor paragraph
(h)(9)(x)(A) of this section precludes a
taxpayer from applying the provisions of
section 1366(f)(2) (relating to treatment
of the tax imposed by section 1374 as a
loss sustained by the S corporation) in de-
termining the amount of tax payable
under paragraph (h)(9) of this section.
(C) Procedural and administrative pro-
visions. For purposes of subtitle F, the
amount determined under this paragraph
(h)(9) is treated as a tax imposed by sec-
tion 1 or 11, as appropriate.
(D) Installment method. The gain sub-
ject to the tax determined under paragraph
2000–7 I.R.B.607February 14, 2000

(h)(9)(i) of this section may not be re-
ported under the method described in sec-
tion 453(a). Any such gain that would,
but for the application of this paragraph
(h)(9)(x)(D), be taken into account under
section 453(a) shall be taken into account
in the same manner as if an election under
section 453(d) (relating to the election not
to apply section 453(a)) had been made.
(xi) Special rules for persons not other-
wise subject to Federal income tax. If the
person making the election under this para-
graph (h)(9) with respect to a disposition is
not otherwise subject to Federal income
tax, the election statement satisfying the re-
quirements of paragraph (h)(9)(viii) of this
section must be filed with the Philadelphia
Service Center. For purposes of this para-
graph (h)(9) and subtitle F, the statement is
treated as an income tax return for the cal-
endar year in which the disposition occurs
and as a return due on or before March 15
of the following year.
(10) Transactions subject to both anti-
churning and nonrecognition rules. If a
person acquires a section 197(f)(9) intan-
gible in a transaction described in para-
graph (g)(2) of this section from a person
in whose hands the intangible was an
amortizable section 197 intangible, and
immediately after the transaction (or se-
ries of transactions described in paragraph
(h)(6)(ii)(B) of this section) in which such
intangible is acquired, the person acquir-
ing the section 197(f)(9) intangible is re-
lated to any person described in paragraph
(h)(2) of this section, the intangible is,
notwithstanding its treatment under para-
graph (g)(2) of this section, treated as an
amortizable section 197 intangible only to
the extent permitted under this paragraph
(h). (See, for example, paragraph
(h)(5)(ii) of this section.)
(11) Avoidance purpose. A section
197(f)(9) intangible acquired by a tax-
payer after the applicable effective date
does not qualify for amortization under
section 197 if one of the principal pur-
poses of the transaction in which it is ac-
quired is to avoid the operation of the
anti-churning rules of section 197(f)(9)
and this paragraph (h). A transaction will
be presumed to have a principal purpose
of avoidance if it does not effect a signifi-
cant change in the ownership or use of the
intangible. Thus, for example, if section
197(f)(9) intangibles are acquired in a
transaction (or series of related transac-
tions) in which an option to acquire stock
is issued to a party to the transaction, but
the option is not treated as having been
exercised for purposes of paragraph (h)(6)
of this section, this paragraph (h)(11) may
apply to the transaction.
(12) Additional partnership anti-churn-
ing rules—(i) In general. In determining
whether the anti-churning rules of this
paragraph (h) apply to any increase in the
basis of a section 197(f)(9) intangible
under section 732(b), 732(d), 734(b), or
743(b), the determinations are made at the
partner level and each partner is treated as
having owned and used the partner’s pro-
portionate share of partnership property.
In determining whether the anti-churning
rules of this paragraph (h) apply to any
transaction under another section of the
Internal Revenue Code, the determina-
tions are made at the partnership level,
unless under §1.701–2(e) the Commis-
sioner determines that the partner level is
more appropriate.
(ii) Section 732(b) adjustments—Re-
served.
(iii) Section 732(d) adjustments. The
anti-churning rules of this paragraph (h)
do not apply to an increase in the basis of
partnership property under section 732(d)
if the distributee partner was not related
(at the time of the transfer of the partner-
ship interest) to the person who trans-
ferred the partnership interest with respect
to which the distribution is being made.
(iv) Section 734(b) adjustments— Re-
served.
(v) Section 743(b) adjustments. The
anti-churning rules of this paragraph (h)
do not apply to an increase in the basis of
partnership property under section 743(b)
if the person acquiring the partnership in-
terest is not related to the person transfer-
ring the partnership interest.
(vi) Partner is or becomes a user of
partnership intangible—(A) General
rule. If, as part of a series of related trans-
actions that includes a transaction de-
scribed in paragraph (h)(12) (iii) or (v) of
this section, an anti-churning partner or a
person related to an anti-churning partner
becomes (or remains) a user of an intangi-
ble that is treated as transferred in the
transaction (as a result of the partners
being treated as having owned their pro-
portionate share of partnership assets), the
anti-churning rules of this paragraph (h)
apply to the proportionate share of such
intangible that is treated as transferred by
the anti-churning partner, notwithstanding
the application of paragraph (h)(12) (iii)
or (v) of this section.
(B) Anti-churning partner. For pur-
poses of this paragraph (h)(12)(vi), anti-
churning partner means - -
(1) With respect to all intangibles held by
a partnership on or before August 10, 1993,
any partner, but only to the extent that
(i) The partner’s interest in the partner-
ship was acquired on or before August 10,
1993, or
(ii) The interest was acquired from a
person related to the partner on or after
August 10, 1993, and such interest was
not held by any person other than persons
related to such partner at any time after
August 10, 1993 (disregarding, for this
purpose, a person’s holding of an interest
if the acquisition of such interest was part
of a transaction or series of related trans-
actions in which the partner or persons re-
lated to the partner subsequently acquired
such interest),
(2) With respect to any section
197(f)(9) intangible acquired by a part-
nership after August 10, 1993, that is not
amortizable with respect to the partner-
ship, any partner, but only to the extent
that
(i) The partner’s interest in the partner-
ship was acquired on or before the date
the partnership acquired the section
197(f)(9) intangible, or
(ii) The interest was acquired from a
person related to the partner on or after
the date the partnership acquired the sec-
tion 197(f)(9) intangible, and such inter-
est was not held by any person other than
persons related to such partner at any time
after the date the partnership acquired the
section 197(f)(9) intangible (disregarding,
for this purpose, a person’s holding of an
interest if the acquisition of such interest
was part of a transaction or series of re-
lated transactions in which the partner or
persons related to the partner subse-
quently acquired such interest), and
(3) With respect to any intangible, a
partner who received an interest in the
partnership in exchange for such intangi-
ble (or a portion thereof) or a related per-
son who received such interest in the part-
nership from such a partner, but only to
the extent that the intangible (or portion
thereof) transferred by such partner is not
an amortizable section 197 intangible
February 14, 20006082000–7 I.R.B.

with respect to the partnership.
(C) Effect of retroactive elections. For
purposes of paragraph (h)(12)(vi)(B) of
this section, references to August 10,
1993, are treated as references to July 25,
1991, if the relevant party made a valid
retroactive election under §1.197–1T.
(vii) Section 704(c) allocations—(A)
Allocations where the intangible is amortiz-
able by the contributor. The anti-churning
rules of this paragraph (h) do not apply to
the curative or remedial allocations of
amortization with respect to a section
197(f)(9) intangible if the intangible was an
amortizable section 197 intangible in the
hands of the contributing partner (unless
paragraph (h)(10) of this section applies so
as to cause the intangible to cease to be an
amortizable section 197 intangible in the
hands of the partnership).
(B) Allocations where the intangible is
not amortizable by the contributor.
Notwithstanding paragraph (g)(3)(ii) of this
section, where the section 197(f)(9) intan-
gible was not an amortizable section 197
intangible in the hands of the contributing
partner, a partner may not receive remedial
allocations of amortization under section
704(c) that are deductible for Federal in-
come tax purposes if that partner is related
to the partner that contributed the intangi-
ble. Taxpayers may use any reasonable
method to determine amortization of the
asset for book purposes, provided that the
method used does not contravene the pur-
poses of the anti-churning rules under sec-
tion 197 and this paragraph (h). A method
will be considered to contravene the pur-
poses of the anti-churning rules if the effect
of the book adjustments resulting from the
method is such that any portion of the tax
deduction for amortization attributable to
section 704(c) is allocated, directly or indi-
rectly, to a partner who is subject to the
anti-churning rules with respect to such ad-
justment.
(viii) Operating rule for transfers upon
death. For purposes of this paragraph
(h)(12), if the basis of a partner’s interest
in a partnership is determined under sec-
tion 1014(a), such partner is treated as ac-
quiring such interest from a person who is
not related to such partner, and such inter-
est is treated as having previously been
held by a person who is not related to
such partner.
(i) [Reserved]
(j) General anti-abuse rule. The Com-
missioner will interpret and apply the
rules in this section as necessary and ap-
propriate to prevent avoidance of the pur-
poses of section 197. If one of the princi-
pal purposes of a transaction is to achieve
a tax result that is inconsistent with the
purposes of section 197, the Commis-
sioner will recast the transaction for Fed-
eral tax purposes as appropriate to
achieve tax results that are consistent with
the purposes of section 197, in light of the
applicable statutory and regulatory provi-
sions and the pertinent facts and circum-
stances.
(k) Examples. The following examples illustrate
the application of this section:
Example 1. Advertising costs.(i) Q manufactures
and sells consumer products through a series of whole-
salers and distributors. In order to increase sales of its
products by encouraging consumer loyalty to its prod-
ucts and to enhance the value of the goodwill, trade-
marks, and trade names of the business, Q advertises
its products to the consuming public. It regularly in-
curs costs to develop radio, television, and print adver-
tisements. These costs generally consist of employee
costs and amounts paid to independent advertising
agencies. Q also incurs costs to run these advertise-
ments in the various media for which they were devel-
oped.
(ii) The advertising costs are not chargeable to cap-
ital account under paragraph (f)(3) of this section (re-
lating to costs incurred for covenants not to compete,
rights granted by governmental units, and contracts for
the use of section 197 intangibles) and are currently
deductible as ordinary and necessary expenses under
section 162. Accordingly, under paragraph (a)(3) of
this section, section 197 does not apply to these costs.
Example 2. Computer software.(i) X purchases
all of the assets of an existing trade or business from Y.
One of the assets acquired is all of Y’s rights in certain
computer software previously used by Y under the
terms of a nonexclusive license from the software de-
veloper. The software was developed for use by man-
ufacturers to maintain a comprehensive accounting
system, including general and subsidiary ledgers, pay-
roll, accounts receivable and payable, cash receipts
and disbursements, fixed asset accounting, and inven-
tory cost accounting and controls. The developer
modified the software for use by Y at a cost of $1,000
and Y made additional modifications at a cost of $500.
The developer does not maintain wholesale or retail
outlets but markets the software directly to ultimate
users. Y’s license of the software is limited to an en-
tity that is actively engaged in business as a manufac-
turer.
(ii) Notwithstanding these limitations, the software
is considered to be readily available to the general
public for purposes of paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this sec-
tion. In addition, the software is not substantially
modified because the cost of the modifications by the
developer and Y to the version of the software that is
readily available to the general public does not exceed
$2,000. Accordingly, the software is not a section 197
intangible.
Example 3. Acquisition of software for internal
use. (i) B, the owner and operator of a worldwide
package-delivery service, purchases from S all rights
to software developed by S. The software will be used
by B for the sole purpose of improving its package-
tracking operations. B does not purchase any other as-
sets in the transaction or any related transaction.
(ii) Because B acquired the software solely for in-
ternal use, it is disregarded in determining for pur-
poses of paragraph (c)(4)(ii) of this section whether
the assets acquired in the transaction or series of re-
lated transactions constitute a trade or business or sub-
stantial portion thereof. Since no other assets were
acquired, the software is not acquired as part of a pur-
chase of a trade or business and under paragraph
(c)(4)(ii) of this section is not a section 197 intangible.
Example 4. Governmental rights of fixed duration.
(i) City M operates a municipal water system. In order
to induce X to locate a new manufacturing business in
the city, M grants X the right to purchase water for 16
years at a specified price.
(ii) The right granted by M is a right to receive tan-
gible property or services described in section
197(e)(4)(B) and paragraph (c)(6) of this section and,
thus, is not a section 197 intangible. This exclusion
applies even though the right does not qualify for ex-
clusion as a right of fixed duration or amount under
section 197(e)(4)(D) and paragraph (c)(13) of this sec-
tion because the duration exceeds 15 years and the
right is not fixed as to amount. It is also immaterial
that the right would not qualify for exclusion as a self-
created intangible under section 197(c)(2) and para-
graph (d)(2) of this section because it is granted by a
governmental unit.
Example 5. Separate acquisition of franchise. (i) S
is a franchiser of retail outlets for specialty coffees. G
enters into a franchise agreement (within the meaning
of section 1253(b)(1)) with S pursuant to which G is
permitted to acquire and operate a store using the S
trademark and trade name at the location specified in
the agreement. G agrees to pay S $100,000 upon exe-
cution of the agreement and also agrees to pay,
throughout the term of the franchise, additional
amounts that are deductible under section 1253(d)(1).
The agreement contains detailed specifications for the
construction and operation of the business, but G is
not required to purchase from S any of the materials
necessary to construct the improvements at the loca-
tion specified in the franchise agreement.
(ii) The franchise is a section 197 intangible within
the meaning of paragraph (b)(10) of this section. The
franchise does not qualify for the exclusion relating to
self-created intangibles described in section 197(c)(2)
and paragraph (d)(2) of this section because the fran-
chise is described in section 197(d)(1)(F). In addition,
because the acquisition of the franchise constitutes the
acquisition of an interest in a trade or business or a
substantial portion thereof, the franchise may not be
excluded under section 197(e)(4). Thus, the franchise
is an amortizable section 197 intangible, the basis of
which must be recovered over a 15-year period. How-
ever, the amounts that are deductible under section
1253(d)(1)are not subject to the provisions of section
197 by reason of section 197(f)(4)(C) and paragraph
(b)(10)(ii) of this section.
Example 6. Acquisition and amortization of
covenant not to compete. (i) As part of the acquisition
of a trade or business from C, B and C enter into an
agreement containing a covenant not to compete.
Under this agreement, C agrees that it will not com-
pete with the business acquired by B within a pre-
scribed geographical territory for a period of three
years after the date on which the business is sold to B.
2000–7 I.R.B.609February 14, 2000

In exchange for this agreement, B agrees to pay C
$90,000 per year for each year in the term of the agree-
ment. The agreement further provides that, in the
event of a breach by C of his obligations under the
agreement, B may terminate the agreement, cease
making any of the payments due thereafter, and pursue
any other legal or equitable remedies available under
applicable law. The amounts payable to C under the
agreement are not contingent payments for purposes
of §1.1275–4. The present fair market value of B’s
rights under the agreement is $225,000. The aggre-
gate consideration paid for all assets acquired in the
transaction (including the covenant not to compete)
exceeds the sum of the amount of Class I assets and
the aggregate fair market value of all Class II, Class
III, Class IV, Class V, and Class VI assets by $50,000.
See §1.338–6T(b) for rules for determining the assets
in each class.
(ii) Because the covenant is acquired in an applica-
ble asset acquisition (within the meaning of section
1060(c)), paragraph (f)(4)(ii) of this section applies
and the basis of B in the covenant is determined pur-
suant to section 1060(a) and the regulations thereun-
der. Under §§1.1060–1T(c)(2) and 1.338–6T(c)(1),
B’s basis in the covenant cannot exceed its fair market
value. Thus, B’s basis in the covenant immediately
after the acquisition is $225,000. This basis is amor-
tized ratably over the 15-year period beginning on the
first day of the month in which the agreement is en-
tered into. Although the payments under the agree-
ment ($270,000) exceed the amount allocated to the
covenant by $45,000, all of the remaining considera-
tion ($50,000) is allocated to Class VII assets (good-
will and going concern value). See
§§1.1060–1T(c)(2) and 1.338–6T(b).
Example 7. Stand-alone license of technology.(i)
X is a manufacturer of consumer goods that does busi-
ness throughout the world through subsidiary corpora-
tions organized under the laws of each country in
which business is conducted. X licenses to Y, its sub-
sidiary organized and conducting business in Country
K, all of the patents, formulas, designs, and know-how
necessary for Y to manufacture the same products that
X manufactures in the United States. Assume that the
license is not considered a sale or exchange under the
principles of section 1235. The license is for a term of
18 years, and there are no facts to indicate that the li-
cense does not have a fixed duration. Y agrees to pay
X a royalty equal to a specified, fixed percentage of
the revenues obtained from selling products manufac-
tured using the licensed technology. Assume that the
royalty is reasonable and is not subject to adjustment
under section 482. The license is not entered into in
connection with any other transaction. Y incurs capi-
talized costs in connection with entering into the li-
cense.
(ii) The license is a contract for the use of a section
197 intangible within the meaning of paragraph
(b)(11) of this section. It does not qualify for the ex-
ception in section 197(e)(4)(D) and paragraph (c)(13)
of this section (relating to rights of fixed duration or
amount) because it does not have a term of less than
15 years, and the other exceptions in section 197(e)
and paragraph (c) of this section are also inapplicable.
Accordingly, the license is a section 197 intangible.
(iii) The license is not acquired as part of a pur-
chase of a trade or business. Thus, under paragraph
(f)(3)(iii) of this section, the license will be closely
scrutinized under the principles of section 1235 for
purposes of determining whether the transfer is a sale
or exchange and, accordingly, whether the payments
under the license are chargeable to capital account.
Because the license is not a sale or exchange under the
principles of section 1235, the royalty payments are
not chargeable to capital account for purposes section
197. The capitalized costs of entering into the license
are not within the exception under paragraph (d)(2) of
this section for self-created intangibles, and thus are
amortized under section 197.
Example 8. License of technology and trademarks
. (i) The facts are the same as in Example 7, except
that the license also includes the use of the trademarks
and trade names that X uses to manufacture and dis-
tribute its products in the United States. Assume that
under the principles of section 1253 the transfer is not
a sale or exchange of the trademarks and trade names
or an undivided interest therein and that the royalty
payments are described in section 1253(d)(1)(B).
(ii) As in Example 7, the license is a section 197 in-
tangible. Although the license conveys an interest in
X’s trademarks and trade names to Y, the transfer of
the interest is disregarded for purposes of paragraph
(e)(2) of this section unless the transfer is considered a
sale or exchange of the trademarks and trade names or
an undivided interest therein. Accordingly, the licens-
ing of the technology and the trademarks and trade
names is not treated as part of a purchase of a trade or
business under paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
(iii) Because the technology license is not part of
the purchase of a trade or business, it is treated in the
manner described in Example 7.The royalty pay-
ments for the use of the trademarks and trade names
are deductible under section 1253(d)(1) and, under
section 197(f)(4)(C) and paragraph (b)(10)(ii) of this
section, are not chargeable to capital account for pur-
poses of section 197. The capitalized costs of entering
into the license are treated in the same manner as in
example 7.
Example 9. Disguised sale. (i) The facts are the
same as in Example 7, except that Y agrees to pay X,
in addition to the contingent royalty, a fixed minimum
royalty immediately upon entering into the agreement
and there are sufficient facts present to characterize the
transaction, for federal tax purposes, as a transfer of
ownership of the intellectual property from X to Y.
(ii) The purported license of technology is, in fact,
an acquisition of an intangible described in section
197(d)(1)(C)(iii) and paragraph (b)(5) of this section
(relating to know-how, etc.). As in Example 7, the ex-
ceptions in section 197(e) and paragraph (c) of this
section do not apply to the transfer. Accordingly, the
transferred property is a section 197 intangible. Y’s
basis in the transferred intangible includes the capital-
ized costs of entering into the agreement and the fixed
minimum royalty payment payable at the time of the
transfer. In addition, except to the extent that a portion
of any payment will be treated as interest or original
issue discount under applicable provisions of the Inter-
nal Revenue Code, all of the contingent payments
under the purported license are properly chargeable to
capital account for purposes of section 197 and this
section. The extent to which such payments are
treated as payments of principal and the time at which
any amount treated as a payment of principal is taken
into account in determining basis are determined
under the rules of §1.1275–4(c)(4) or 1.483–4(a),
whichever is applicable. Any contingent amount that
is included in basis after the month in which the acqui-
sition occurs is amortized under the rules of paragraph
(f)(2)(i) or (ii) of this section.
Example 10. License of technology and customer
list as part of sale of a trade or business. (i) X is a
computer manufacturer that produces, in separate op-
erating divisions, personal computers, servers, and pe-
ripheral equipment. In a transaction that is the pur-
chase of a trade or business for purposes of section
197, Y (who is unrelated to X) purchases from X all
assets of the operating division producing personal
computers, except for certain patents that are also used
in the division manufacturing servers and customer
lists that are also used in the division manufacturing
peripheral equipment. As part of the transaction, X
transfers to Y the right to use the retained patents and
customer lists solely in connection with the manufac-
ture and sale of personal computers. The transfer
agreement requires annual royalty payments contin-
gent on the use of the patents and also requires a pay-
ment for each use of the customer list. In addition, Y
incurs capitalized costs in connection with entering
into the licenses.
(ii) The rights to use the retained patents and cus-
tomer lists are contracts for the use of section 197 in-
tangibles within the meaning of paragraph (b)(11) of
this section. The rights do not qualify for the excep-
tion in 197(e)(4)(D) and paragraph (c)(13) of this sec-
tion (relating to rights of fixed duration or amount) be-
cause they are transferred as part of a purchase of a
trade or business and the other exceptions in section
197(e) and paragraph (c) of this section are also inap-
plicable. Accordingly, the licenses are section 197 in-
tangibles.
(iii) Because the right to use the retained patents is
described in paragraph (b)(11) of this section and the
right is transferred as part of a purchase of a trade or
business, the treatment of the royalty payments is de-
termined under paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this section. In
addition, however, the retained patents are described
in paragraph (b)(5) of this section. Thus, the annual
royalty payments are chargeable to capital account
under the general rule of paragraph (f)(3)(ii)(A) of this
section unless Y establishes that the license is not a
sale or exchange under the principles of section 1235
and the royalty payments are an arm’s length consider-
ation for the rights transferred. If these facts are estab-
lished, the exception in paragraph (f)(3)(ii)(B) of this
section applies and the royalty payments are not
chargeable to capital account for purposes of section
197. The capitalized costs of entering into the license
are treated in the same manner as in Example 7.
(iv) The right to use the retained customer list is
also described in paragraph (b)(11) of this section and
is transferred as part of a purchase of a trade or busi-
ness. Thus, the treatment of the payments for use of
the customer list is also determined under paragraph
(f)(3)(ii) of this section. The customer list, although
described in paragraph (b)(6) of this section, is a cus-
tomer-related information base. Thus, the exception in
paragraph (f)(3)(ii)(B) of this section does not apply.
Accordingly, payments for use of the list are charge-
able to capital account under the general rule of para-
graph (f)(3)(ii)(A) of this section and are amortized
under section 197. In addition, the capitalized costs of
entering into the contract for use of the customer list
are treated in the same manner as in Example 7.
Example 11. Loss disallowance rules involving re-
lated persons. (i) Assume that X and Y are treated as a
single taxpayer for purposes of paragraph (g)(1) of this
section. In a single transaction, X and Y acquired
from Z all of the assets used by Z in a trade or busi-
ness. Z had operated this business at two locations,
February 14, 20006102000–7 I.R.B.

and X and Y each acquired the assets used by Z at one
of the locations. Three years after the acquisition, X
sold all of the assets it acquired, including amortizable
section 197 intangibles, to an unrelated purchaser.
The amortizable section intangibles are sold at a loss
of $120,000.
(ii) Because X and Y are treated as a single tax-
payer for purposes of the loss disallowance rules of
section 197(f)(1) and paragraph (g)(1) of this section,
X’s loss on the sale of the amortizable section 197 in-
tangibles is not recognized. Under paragraph
(g)(1)(iv)(B) of this section, X’s disallowed loss is al-
lowed ratably, as a deduction under section 197, over
the remainder of the 15-year period during which the
intangibles would have been amortized, and Y may
not increase the basis of the amortizable section 197
intangibles that it acquired from Z by the amount of
X’s disallowed loss.
Example 12. Disposition of retained intangibles by
related person. (i) The facts are the same as in Exam-
ple 11, except that 10 years after the acquisition of the
assets by X and Y and 7 years after the sale of the as-
sets by X, Y sells all of the assets acquired from Z, in-
cluding amortizable section 197 intangibles, to an un-
related purchaser.
(ii) Under paragraph (g)(1)(iv)(B) of this section, X
may recognize, on the date of the sale by Y, any loss
that has not been allowed as a deduction under section
197. Accordingly, X recognizes a loss of $50,000, the
amount obtained by reducing the loss on the sale of the
assets at the end of the third year ($120,000) by the
amount allowed as a deduction under paragraph
(g)(1)(iv)(B) of this section during the 7 years follow-
ing the sale by X ($70,000).
Example 13. Acquisition of an interest in partner-
ship with no section 754 election. (i) A, B, and C each
contribute $1,500 for equal shares in general partner-
ship P. On January 1, 1998, P acquires as its sole asset
an amortizable section 197 intangible for $4,500. P
still holds the intangible on January 1, 2003, at which
time the intangible has an adjusted basis to P of
$3,000, and A, B, and C each have an adjusted basis of
$1,000 in their partnership interests. D (who is not re-
lated to A) acquires A’s interest in P for $1,600. No
section 754 election is in effect for 2003.
(ii) Because there is no change in the basis of the
intangible under section 743(b), D merely steps into
the shoes of A with respect to the intangible. D’s pro-
portionate share of P’s adjusted basis in the intangible
is $1,000, which continues to be amortized over the 10
years remaining in the original 15-year amortization
period for the intangible.
Example 14. Acquisition of an interest in partner-
ship with a section 754 election. (i) The facts are the
same as in Example 13, except that a section 754 elec-
tion is in effect for 2003.
(ii) Pursuant to paragraph (g)(3) of this section, for
purposes of section 197, D is treated as if P owns two
assets. D’s proportionate share of P’s adjusted basis in
one asset is $1,000, which continues to be amortized
over the 10 years remaining in the original 15-year
amortization period. For the other asset, D’s propor-
tionate share of P’s adjusted basis is $600 (the amount
of the basis increase under section 743 as a result of
the section 754 election), which is amortized over a
new 15-year period beginning January 2003. With re-
spect to B and C, P’s remaining $2,000 adjusted basis
in the intangible continues to be amortized over the 10
years remaining in the original 15-year amortization
period.
Example 15. Payment to a retiring partner by
partnership with a section 754 election.(i) The facts
are the same as in Example 13, except that a section
754 election is in effect for 2003 and, instead of D ac-
quiring A’s interest in P, A retires from P. A, B, and C
are not related to each other within the meaning of
paragraph (h)(6) of this section. P borrows $1,600,
and A receives a payment under section 736 from P of
such amount, all of which is in exchange for A’s inter-
est in the intangible asset owned by P. (Assume, for
purposes of this example, that the borrowing by P and
payment of such funds to A does not give rise to a dis-
guised sale of A’s partnership interest under section
707(a)(2)(B).) P makes a positive basis adjustment of
$600 with respect to the section 197 intangible under
section 734(b).
(ii) Pursuant to paragraph (g)(3) of this section, be-
cause of the section 734 adjustment, P is treated as
having two amortizable section 197 intangibles, one
with a basis of $3,000 and a remaining amortization
period of 10 years and the other with a basis of $600
and a new amortization period of 15 years.
Example 16. Termination of partnership under
section 708(b)(1)(B). (i) A and B are partners with
equal shares in the capital and profits of general part-
nership P. P’s only asset is an amortizable section 197
intangible, which P had acquired on January 1, 1995.
On January 1, 2000, the asset had a fair market value
of $100 and a basis to P of $50. On that date, A sells
his entire partnership interest in P to C, who is unre-
lated to A, for $50. At the time of the sale, the basis of
each of A and B in their respective partnership inter-
ests is $25.
(ii) The sale causes a termination of P under section
708(b)(1)(B). Under section 708, the transaction is
treated as if P transfers its sole asset to a new partner-
ship in exchange for the assumption of its liabilities
and the receipt of all of the interests in the new part-
nership. Immediately thereafter, P is treated as if it is
liquidated, with B and C each receiving their propor-
tionate share of the interests in the new partnership.
The contribution by P of its asset to the new partner-
ship is governed by section 721, and the liquidating
distributions by P of the interests in the new partner-
ship are governed by section 731. C does not realize a
basis adjustment under section 743 with respect to the
amortizable section 197 intangible unless P had a sec-
tion 754 election in effect for its taxable year in which
the transfer of the partnership interest to C occurred or
the taxable year in which the deemed liquidation of P
occurred.
(iii) Under section 197, if P had a section 754 elec-
tion in effect, C is treated as if the new partnership had
acquired two assets from P immediately preceding its
termination. Even though the adjusted basis of the
new partnership in the two assets is determined solely
under section 723, because the transfer of assets is a
transaction described in section 721, the application of
sections 743(b) and 754 to P immediately before its
termination causes P to be treated as if it held two as-
sets for purposes of section 197. See paragraph (g)(3)
of this section. B’s and C’s proportionate share of the
new partnership’s adjusted basis is $25 each in one
asset, which continues to be amortized over the 10
years remaining in the original 15-year amortization
period. For the other asset, C’s proportionate share of
the new partnership’s adjusted basis is $25 (the
amount of the basis increase resulting from the appli-
cation of section 743 to the sale or exchange by A of
the interest in P), which is amortized over a new 15-
year period beginning in January 2000.
(iv) If P did not have a section 754 election in effect
for its taxable year in which the sale of the partnership
interest by A to C occurred or the taxable year in
which the deemed liquidation of P occurred, the ad-
justed basis of the new partnership in the amortizable
section 197 intangible is determined solely under sec-
tion 723, because the transfer is a transaction de-
scribed in section 721, and P does not have a basis in-
crease in the intangible. Under section 197(f)(2) and
paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this section, the new partner-
ship continues to amortize the intangible over the 10
years remaining in the original 15-year amortization
period. No additional amortization is allowable with
respect to this asset.
Example 17. Disguised sale to partnership. (i) E
and F are individuals who are unrelated to each other
within the meaning of paragraph (h)(6) of this section.
E has been engaged in the active conduct of a trade or
business as a sole proprietor since 1990. E and F form
EF Partnership. E transfers all of the assets of the
business, having a fair market value of $100, to EF,
and F transfers $40 of cash to EF. E receives a 60 per-
cent interest in EF and the $40 of cash contributed by
F, and F receives a 40 percent interest in EF, under cir-
cumstances in which the transfer by E is partially
treated as a sale of property to EF under §1.707–3(b).
(ii) Under §1.707–3(a)(1), the transaction is treated
as if E had sold to EF a 40 percent interest in each
asset for $40 and contributed the remaining 60 percent
interest in each asset to EF in exchange solely for an
interest in EF. Because E and EF are related persons
within the meaning of paragraph (h)(6) of this section,
no portion of any transferred section 197(f)(9) intangi-
ble that E held during the transition period (as defined
in paragraph (h)(4) of this section) is an amortizable
section 197 intangible pursuant to paragraph (h)(2) of
this section. Section 197(f)(9)(E) and paragraph (g)(3)
of this section do not apply to any portion of the sec-
tion 197 intangible in the hands of EF because the
basis of EF in these assets was not increased under any
of sections 732, 734, or 743.
Example 18. Acquisition by related person in non-
recognition transaction.(i) A owns a nonamortizable
intangible that A acquired in 1990. In 2000, A sells a
one-half interest in the intangible to B for cash. Imme-
diately after the sale, A and B, who are unrelated to
each other, form partnership P as equal partners. A
and B each contribute their one-half interest in the in-
tangible to P.
(ii) P has a transferred basis in the intangible from
A and B under section 723. The nonrecognition trans-
fer rule under paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this section ap-
plies to A’s transfer of its one-half interest in the intan-
gible to P, and consequently P steps into A’s shoes with
respect to A’s nonamortizable transferred basis. The
anti-churning rules of paragraph (h) of this section
apply to B’s transfer of its one-half interest in the in-
tangible to P, because A, who is related to P under
paragraph (h)(6) of this section immediately after the
series of transactions in which the intangible was ac-
quired by P, held B’s one-half interest in the intangible
during the transition period. Pursuant to paragraph
(h)(10) of this section, these rules apply to B’s transfer
of its one-half interest to P even though the nonrecog-
nition transfer rule under paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this
section would have permitted P to step into B’s shoes
with respect to B’s otherwise amortizable basis.
Therefore, P’s entire basis in the intangible is non-
amortizable. However, if A (not B) elects to recognize
2000–7 I.R.B.611February 14, 2000

gain under paragraph (h)(9) of this section on the
transfer of each of the one-half interests in the intangi-
ble to B and P, then the intangible would be amortiz-
able by P to the extent provided in section 197(f)(9)(B)
and paragraph (h)(9) of this section.
Example 19. Acquisition of partnership interest
following formation of partnership.(i) The facts are
the same as in Example 18except that, in 2000, A
formed P with an affiliate, S, and contributed the in-
tangible to the partnership and except that in a subse-
quent year, in a transaction that is properly character-
ized as a sale of a partnership interest for Federal tax
purposes, B purchases a 50 percent interest in P from
A. P has a section 754 election in effect and holds no
assets other than the intangible and cash.
(ii) For the reasons set forth in Example 16(iii), B is
treated as if P owns two assets. B’s proportionate
share of P’s adjusted basis in one asset is the same as
A’s proportionate share of P’s adjusted basis in that
asset, which is not amortizable under section 197. For
the other asset, B’s proportionate share of the remain-
ing adjusted basis of P is amortized over a new 15-
year period.
Example 20. Acquisition by related corporation in
nonrecognition transaction. (i) The facts are the same
as Example 18, except that A and B form corporation P
as equal owners.
(ii) P has a transferred basis in the intangible from
A and B under section 362. Pursuant to paragraph
(h)(10) of this section, the application of the nonrecog-
nition transfer rule under paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this
section and the anti-churning rules of paragraph (h) of
this section to the facts of this Example 18is the same
as in Example 16. Thus, P’s entire basis in the intangi-
ble is nonamortizable.
Example 21. Acquisition from corporation related
to purchaser through remote indirect interest. (i) X, Y,
and Z are each corporations that have only one class of
issued and outstanding stock. X owns 25 percent of
the stock of Y and Y owns 25 percent of the outstand-
ing stock of Z. No other shareholder of any of these
corporations is related to any other shareholder or to
any of the corporations. On June 30, 2000, X pur-
chases from Z section 197(f)(9) intangibles that Z
owned during the transition period (as defined in para-
graph (h)(4) of this section).
(ii) Pursuant to paragraph (h)(6)(iv)(B) of this sec-
tion, the beneficial ownership interest of X in Z is 6.25
percent, determined by treating X as if it owned a pro-
portionate (25 percent) interest in the stock of Z that is
actually owned by Y. Thus, even though X is related
to Y and Y is related to Z, X and Z are not considered
to be related for purposes of the anti-churning rules of
section 197.
Example 22. Gain recognition election.(i) B owns
25 percent of the stock of S, a corporation that uses the
calendar year as its taxable year. No other shareholder
of B or S is related to each other. S is not a member of
a controlled group of corporations within the meaning
of section 1563(a). S has section 197(f)(9) intangibles
that it owned during the transition period. S has a
basis of $25,000 in the intangibles. In 2001, S sells
these intangibles to B for $75,000. S recognizes a gain
of $50,000 on the sale and has no other items of in-
come, deduction, gain, or loss for the year, except that
S also has a net operating loss of $20,000 from prior
years that it would otherwise be entitled to use in 2001
pursuant to section 172(b). S makes a valid gain
recognition election pursuant to section 197(f)(9)(B)
and paragraph (h)(9) of this section. In 2001, the high-
est marginal tax rate applicable to S is 35 percent. But
for the election, all of S’s taxable income would be
taxed at a rate of 15 percent.
(ii) If the gain recognition election had not been
made, S would have taxable income of $30,000 for
2001 and a tax liability of $4,500. If the gain were not
taken into account, S would have no tax liability for
the taxable year. Thus, the amount of tax (other than
the tax imposed under paragraph (h)(9) of this section)
imposed on the gain is also $4,500. The gain on the
disposition multiplied by the highest marginal tax rate
is $17,500 ($50,000 x .35). Accordingly, S’s tax liabil-
ity for the year is $4,500 plus an additional tax under
paragraph (h)(9) of this section of $13,000 ($17,500 -
$4,500).
(iii) Pursuant to paragraph (h)(9)(x)(A) of this sec-
tion, S determines the amount of its net operating loss
deduction in subsequent years without regard to the
gain recognized on the sale of the section 197 intangi-
ble to B. Accordingly, the entire $20,000 net operating
loss deduction that would have been available in 2001
but for the gain recognition election may be used in
2002, subject to the limitations of section 172.
(iv) B has a basis of $75,000 in the section
197(f)(9) intangibles acquired from S. As the result of
the gain recognition election by S, B may amortize
$50,000 of its basis under section 197. Under para-
graph (h)(9)(ii) of this section, the remaining basis
does not qualify for the gain-recognition exception
and may not be amortized by B.
Example 23. Section 338 election. (i) Corporation
P makes a qualified stock purchase of the stock of T
corporation from two shareholders in July 2000, and a
section 338 election is made by P. No shareholder of
either T or P owns stock in both of these corporations,
and no other shareholder is related to any other share-
holder of either corporation.
(ii) Pursuant to paragraph (h)(8) of this section, in
the case of a qualified stock purchase that is treated as
a deemed sale and purchase of assets pursuant to sec-
tion 338, the corporation treated as purchasing assets
as a result of an election thereunder (new target) is not
considered the person that held or used the assets dur-
ing any period in which the assets were held or used
by the corporation treated as selling the assets (old tar-
get). Because there are no relationships described in
paragraph (h)(6) of this section among the parties to
the transaction, any nonamortizable section 197(f)(9)
intangible held by old target is an amortizable section
197 intangible in the hands of new target.
(iii) Assume the same facts as set forth in para-
graph (i) of this Example 23, except that one of the
selling shareholders is an individual who owns 25 per-
cent of the total value of the stock of each of the T and
P corporation.
(iv) Old target and new target (as these terms are
defined in §1.338–1(c)(13)) are members of a con-
trolled group of corporations under section 267(b)(3),
as modified by section 197(f)(9)(C)(i), and any non-
amortizable section 197(f)(9) intangible held by old
target is not an amortizable section 197 intangible in
the hands of new target. However, a gain recognition
election under paragraph (h)(9) of this section may be
made with respect to this transaction.
Example 24. Relationship created as part of public
offering. (i) On January 1, 2001, Corporation X en-
gages in a series of related transactions to discontinue
its involvement in one line of business. X forms a new
corporation, Y, with a nominal amount of cash.
Shortly thereafter, X transfers all the stock of its sub-
sidiary conducting the unwanted business (Target) to
Y in exchange for 100 shares of Y common stock and
a Y promissory note. Target owns a nonamortizable
section 197(f)(9) intangible. Prior to January 1, 2001,
X and an underwriter (U) had entered into a binding
agreement pursuant to which U would purchase 85
shares of Y common stock from X and then sell those
shares in a public offering. On January 6, 2001, the
public offering closes. X and Y make a section
338(h)(10) election for Target.
(ii) Pursuant to paragraph (h)(8) of this section, in
the case of a qualified stock purchase that is treated as
a deemed sale and purchase of assets pursuant to sec-
tion 338, the corporation treated as purchasing assets
as a result of an election thereunder (new target) is not
considered the person that held or used the assets dur-
ing any period in which the assets were held or used
by the corporation treated as selling the assets (old tar-
get). Further, for purposes of determining whether the
nonamortizable section 197(f)(9) intangible is ac-
quired by new target from a related person, because
the transactions are a series of related transactions, the
relationship between old target and new target must be
tested immediately before the first transaction in the
series (the formation of Y) and immediately after the
last transaction in the series (the sale to U and the pub-
lic offering). See paragraph (h)(6)(ii)(B) of this sec-
tion. Because there was no relationship between old
target and new target immediately before the forma-
tion of Y (because the section 338 election had not
been made) and only a 15% relationship between old
target and new target immediately after, old target is
not related to new target for purposes of applying the
anti-churning rules of paragraph (h) of this section.
Accordingly, Target may amortize the section 197 in-
tangible.
Example 25. Other transfers to controlled corpo-
rations. (i) In 2001, Corporation A transfers a section
197(f)(9) intangible that it held during the transition
period to X, a newly formed corporation, in exchange
for 15% of X’s stock. As part of the same transaction,
B transfers property to X in exchange for the remain-
ing 85% of X stock.
(ii) Because the acquisition of the intangible by X
is part of a qualifying section 351 exchange, under
section 197(f)(2) and paragraph (g)(2)(ii) of this sec-
tion, X is treated in the same manner as the transferor
of the asset. Accordingly, X may not amortize the in-
tangible. If, however, at the time of the exchange, B
has a binding commitment to sell 25 percent of the X
stock to C, an unrelated third party, the exchange, in-
cluding A’s transfer of the section 197(f)(9) intangi-
ble, would fail to qualify as a section 351 exchange.
Because the formation of X, the transfers of property
to X, and the sale of X stock by B are part of a series
of related transactions, the relationship between A and
X must be tested immediately before the first transac-
tion in the series (the transfer of property to X) and im-
mediately after the last transaction in the series (the
sale of X stock to C). See paragraph (h)(6)(ii)(B) of
this section. Because there was no relationship be-
tween A and X immediately before and only a 15% re-
lationship immediately after, A is not related to X for
purposes of applying the anti-churning rules of para-
graph (h) of this section. Accordingly, X may amor-
tize the section 197 intangible.
Example 26. Relationship created as part of stock
acquisition followed by liquidation.(i) In 2001, Part-
nership P purchases 100 percent of the stock of Corpo-
ration X. P and X were not related prior to the acquisi-
February 14, 20006122000–7 I.R.B.

tion. Immediately after acquiring the X stock, and as
part of a series of related transactions, P liquidates X
under section 331. In the liquidating distribution, P re-
ceives a section 197(f)(9) intangible that was held by
X during the transition period.
(ii) Because the relationship between P and X was
created pursuant to a series of related transactions
where P acquires stock (meeting the requirements of
section 1504(a)(2)) in a fully taxable transaction fol-
lowed by a liquidation under section 331, the relation-
ship immediately after the last transaction in the series
(the liquidation) is disregarded. See paragraph
(h)(6)(iii) of this section. Accordingly, P is entitled to
amortize the section 197(f)(9) intangible.
Example 27. Section 743(b) adjustment with no
change in user. (i) On January 1, 2001, A forms a
partnership (PRS) with B in which A owns a 60-per-
cent, and B owns a 40-percent, interest in profits and
capital. A contributes a nonamortizable section
197(f)(9) intangible with a value of $80 and an ad-
justed basis of $0 to PRS in exchange for its PRS in-
terest and B contributes $120 cash. At the time of the
contribution, PRS licenses the section 197(f)(9) intan-
gible to A. On February 1, 2001, A sells its entire in-
terest in PRS to C, an unrelated person, for $80. PRS
has a section 754 election in effect.
(ii) The section 197(f)(9) intangible contributed to
PRS by A is not amortizable in the hands of PRS. Pur-
suant to section (g)(2)(ii) of this section, PRS steps
into the shoes of A with respect to A’s nonamortizable
transferred basis in the intangible.
(iii) When A sells the PRS interest to C, C will have
a basis adjustment in the PRS assets under section
743(b) equal to $80. The entire basis adjustment will
be allocated to the intangible because the only other
asset held by PRS is cash. Ordinarily, under paragraph
(h)(12)(v) of this section, the anti-churning rules will
not apply to an increase in the basis of partnership
property under section 743(b) if the person acquiring
the partnership interest is not related to the person
transferring the partnership interest. However, A is an
anti-churning partner under paragraph
(h)(12)(vi)(B)(3) of this section. Because A remains a
user of the section 197(f)(9) intangible after the trans-
fer to C, paragraph (h)(12)(vi)(A) of this section will
cause the anti-churning rules to apply to the entire
basis adjustment under section 743(b).
(l) Effective dates—(1) In general. This
section applies to property acquired after
January 25, 2000, except that paragraph
(c)(13) of this section (exception from sec-
tion 197 for separately acquired rights of
fixed duration or amount) applies to prop-
erty acquired after August 10, 1993 (or
July 25, 1991, if a valid retroactive election
has been made under §1.197–1T).
(2) Application to pre-effective date ac-
quisitions. A taxpayer may choose, on a
transaction-by-transaction basis, to apply
the provisions of this section and
§1.167(a)–14 to property acquired after
August 10, 1993 (or July 25, 1991, if a
valid retroactive election has been made
under §1.197–1T) and on or before Janu-
ary 25, 2000.
(3) Application of regulation project
REG–209709–94 to pre-effective date ac-
quisitions. A taxpayer may rely on the
provisions of regulation project
REG–209709– 94 (1997–1 C.B. 731) for
property acquired after August 10, 1993
(or July 25, 1991, if a valid retroactive
election has been made under §1.197–1T)
and on or before January 25, 2000.
(4) Change in method of accounting—
(i)In general. For the first taxable year
ending after January 25, 2000, a taxpayer
that has acquired property to which the
exception in §1.197–2(c)(13) applies is
granted consent of the Commissioner to
change its method of accounting for such
property to comply with the provisions of
this section and §1.167(a)–14 unless the
proper treatment of such property is an
issue under consideration (within the
meaning of Rev. Proc. 97–27 (1997–21
IRB 10)(see §601.601(d)(2) of this chap-
ter)) in an examination, before an Appeals
office, or before a Federal court.
(ii) Application to pre-effective date
acquisitions. For the first taxable year
ending after January 25, 2000, a taxpayer
is granted consent of the Commissioner to
change its method of accounting for all
property acquired in transactions de-
scribed in paragraph (l)(2) of this section
to comply with the provisions of this sec-
tion and §1.167(a)–14 unless the proper
treatment of any such property is an issue
under consideration (within the meaning
of Rev. Proc. 97–27 (1997–21 IRB
10)(see §601.601(d)(2) of this chapter))
in an examination, before an Appeals of-
fice, or before a Federal court.
(iii) Automatic change procedures. A
taxpayer changing its method of account-
ing in accordance with this paragraph
(l)(4) must follow the automatic change in
accounting method provisions of Rev.
Proc. 99–49 (1999–52 IRB 725)(see
§601.601(d)(2) of this chapter) except, for
purposes of this paragraph (l)(4), the
scope limitations in section 4.02 of Rev.
Proc. 99–49 (1999–52 IRB 725) are not
applicable. However, if the taxpayer is
under examination, before an appeals of-
fice, or before a federal court, the tax-
payer must provide a copy of the applica-
tion to the examining agent(s), appeals
officer, or counsel for the government, as
appropriate, at the same time that it files
the copy of the application with the Na-
tional Office. The application must con-
tain the name(s) and telephone number(s)
of the examining agent(s), appeals officer,
or counsel for the government, as appro-
priate.
Part 602—OMB CONTROL NUMBERS
UNDER THE PAPERWORK
REDUCTION ACT
Par. 8. The authority citation for part
602 continues to read as follows:
Authority: 26 U.S.C. 7805.
Par. 9. In §602.101, paragraph (b) is
amended by adding an entry to the table
in numerical order to read as follows.
§602.101 OMB Control numbers.
* * * * *
(b) * * *
David Mader,
Acting Deputy Commissioner
of Internal Revenue.
Approved January 14, 2000.
Jonathan Talisman,
Acting Assistant Secretary
of the Treasury.
(Filed by the Office of the Federal Register on Janu-
ary 20, 2000, 1:19 p.m., and published in the issue of
the Federal Register for January 25, 2000, 65 F.R.
3820)
2000–7 I.R.B.613February 14, 2000
CFR part or section whereCurrent OMB
identified and describedcontrol No.
* * * * *
1.197–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1545-1671
* * * * *

Section 274.—Disallowance of
Certain Entertainment, Etc.,
Expenses
26 CFR 1.274–5: Substantiation requirements.
T.D. 8864
DEPARTMENT OF THE TREASURY
Internal Revenue Service
26 CFR Parts 1 and 602
Substantiation of Business
Expenses
AGENCY: Internal Revenue Service
(IRS), Treasury.
ACTION: Final and temporary regula-
tions.
SUMMARY: This document contains
final and temporary Income Tax Regula-
tions that provide rules for the substantia-
tion of certain business expenses under
sections 62 and 274 of the Internal Rev-
enue Code (Code). Individuals and other
taxpayers who claim or reimburse certain
business expenses will be affected by
these regulations.
DATES: Effective date. These regula-
tions are effective January 26, 2000.
Date of Applicability. For date of applic-
ability, see §§1.62–2(m) and 1.274–5(m).
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT: Edwin B. Cleverdon, (202) 622-
4920 (not a toll-free number).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Paperwork Reduction Act
The collection of information con-
tained in these final regulations has been
reviewed and approved by the Office of
Management and Budget in accordance
with the Paperwork Reduction Act of
1995 (44 U.S.C. 3507) under control
number 1545-0771. Responses to this
collection of information are required in
order to deduct certain business expenses
or exclude from income certain reim-
bursed business expenses of employees.
An agency may not conduct or sponsor,
and a person is not required to respond to,
a collection of information unless the col-
lection of information displays a valid
control number.
The estimated annual burden per re-
spondent or recordkeeper varies from 10
minutes to 20 hours, depending on indi-
vidual circumstances, with an estimated
average of 1.3 hours.
Comments concerning the accuracy of
this burden estimate and suggestions or
reducing this burden should be sent to the
Internal Revenue Service, Attn: IRS
Reports Clearance Officer, OP:FS:FP,
Washington, DC 20224, and to the Office
of Management and Budget, Attn: Desk
Officer for the Department of the Trea-
sury, Office of Information and Regula-
tory Affairs, Washington, DC 20503.
Books or records relating to this collec-
tion of information must be retained as
long as their contents may become mater-
ial in the administration of any internal
revenue law. Generally, tax returns and
tax return information are confidential, as
required by 26 U.S.C. 6103.
Background
On November 6, 1985, the IRS pub-
lished in the Federal Register(50 F.R.
46006) temporary regulations (TD 8061,
1985–2 C.B. 93) adding §1.274–5T re-
garding substantiation of expenses with
documentary evidence under section
274(d) of the Code. A notice of proposed
rulemaking (LR–145–84, 1985–2 C.B.
809) cross-referencing the temporary reg-
ulations was published in the Federal
Register(50 F.R. 46087) for the same
day. The notice of proposed rulemaking
invited comments on only those portions
of the temporary regulations under
§1.274–5T that amended §1.274–5 (now
designated §1.274–5A) to reflect contem-
poraneous legislation.
On March 25, 1997, the IRS published
in the Federal Register(62 F.R. 13988)
temporary regulations (T.D. 8715, 1997–1
C.B. 79) amending paragraphs
(c)(2)(iii)(B) and (f)(4) of §1.274–5T.
The amendments raised the receipt
threshold from $25 to $75 and authorized
the Commissioner to prescribe rules mod-
ifying the substantiation requirements for
an adequate accounting by an employee
to an employer. Under the amendment,
the Commissioner could publish rules
defining the circumstances (including the
use of specified internal controls) under
which an employee may make an ade-
quate accounting to his employer by sub-
mitting an expense account alone, without
the necessity of submitting documentary
evidence (such as receipts). A notice of
proposed rulemaking (REG–209785–95,
1997–1 C.B. 753) cross-referencing the
temporary regulations was published in
the Federal Register(62 F.R. 14051) for
the same day.
On October 1, 1998, the IRS published
a notice of proposed rulemaking
(REG–122488–97, 1998–42 I.R.B. 19) in
the Federal Register(63 F.R. 52660),
proposing amendments to the Income Tax
Regulations (26 CFR part 1) under sec-
tions 62(c) and 274(d) of the Code regard-
ing substantiation of expenses using
mileage and per diem rates. Specifically,
the amendments removed the limitation in
§1.274(d)–1(a)(3) that provides that
mileage allowances prescribed in rules by
the Commissioner are available only to
the owner of a vehicle. On that date the
IRS also published temporary Income Tax
Regulations (T.D. 8784, 1998–42 I.R.B.
4) under section 62(c) and 274(d) of the
Code in the Federal Register(63 F.R.
52600), relating to the substantiation of
expenses under a reimbursement or other
expense allowance arrangement.
Comments were received in response
to the 1985 proposed regulations, and a
public hearing was held on March 3,
1986. Few of the written comments, and
none of the comments at the hearing, re-
late to the provisions in this Treasury De-
cision. Written comments were also re-
ceived with respect to the 1997 proposed
regulations, but no public hearing was re-
quested or held. No comments were re-
ceived, and no hearings were requested or
held, with respect to the 1998 proposed
regulations.
Summary and Discussion of Comments
This Treasury Decision incorporates the
suggestions made in the written comments
with some exceptions. With respect to the
1985 regulations, one commentator sug-
gested that the definition of an adequate ac-
counting in §1.274–5T(f)(4), in the case of
automobile expense reimbursements,
should be satisfied by a reimbursement
based on data on the type of automobile
and local operating and fixed costs. Al-
though this suggestion has not been specifi-
cally adopted in the final regulations, the
standard mileage rate revenue procedure
provides for this type of substantiation.
See, e.g., section 8 of Rev. Proc. 98–63,
February 14, 20006142000–7 I.R.B.

1998–52 I.R.B. 25.
Another commentator suggested, inter
alia, (1) adding exceptions to the docu-
mentary evidence requirements under
§1.274–5T(c)(2)(iii) and (2) providing
that the Commissioner, in establishing a
meal allowance under §1.274–5T(j), may
allow a specific dollar allowance per
meal. These suggestions are not adopted
because the intent of the regulations is to
give the Commissioner the discretion to
make these practical decisions.
Similarly, with respect to the 1997 reg-
ulations, commentators made suggestions
regarding the specific content of the guid-
ance to be issued under the proposed reg-
ulations at §1.274–5(f)(4). We did not in-
corporate these suggestions because the
regulations are designed to describe ap-
propriate published guidance of general
applicability, not the specific provisions
of such guidance. However, all of the
comments will be taken into considera-
tion by the Commissioner in issuing pub-
lished guidance.
Explanation of Provisions
This Treasury Decision adopts the revi-
sion to §1.62–2(e)(2) proposed in
REG–122488–97, with minor changes. This
Treasury Decision also adopts
§§1.274–5(c)(2)(iii), (f)(4), (g), (j), and (m)
as proposed by LR–216–84, modified by
REG–209785–95, 1997–1 C.B. 753, and
REG–122488–97, 1998–42 I.R.B. 19, and
removes and reserves the corresponding pro-
visions in §1.274–5T. Finally, this Treasury
Decision adopts the proposal in
REG–122488–97 to remove §§1.62–2T,
1.274(d)–1, and 1.274(d)–1T.
Special Analyses
It has been determined that this Trea-
sury decision is not a significant regula-
tory action as defined in EO 12866.
Therefore, a regulatory assessment is not
required. It also has been determined that
section 553(b) of the Administrative Pro-
cedure Act (5 U.S.C. chapter 5) does not
apply to these regulations. Sections
1.274–5(c)(2)(iii) and (f) were originally
proposed by a notice of proposed rule-
making (LR–145–84) that was issued on
November 6, 1985. Therefore, the Regu-
latory Flexibility Act (5 U.S.C. chapter 6)
does not apply with respect to those col-
lections of information. With respect to
the collection of information in
§1.274–5(c)(iii)(B) as proposed by
REG–209785–95 on March 25, 1997, it is
hereby certified that these regulations will
not have a significant economic impact on
a substantial number of small entities.
This certification is based on the fact that,
by increasing the receipt threshold from
$25 to $75, these regulations reduce the
existing recordkeeping requirements of
taxpayers, including small entities. The
regulations do not otherwise significantly
alter the reporting or recordkeeping duties
of small entities. Therefore, a Regulatory
Flexibility Analysis under the Regulatory
Flexibility Act (5 U.S.C. chapter 6) is not
required. Pursuant to section 7805(f) of
the Internal Revenue Code, the IRS sub-
mitted the notices of proposed rulemaking
preceding these regulations to the Chief
Counsel for Advocacy of the Small Busi-
ness Administration for comment on its
impact on small business.
Drafting Information
The principal author of these final and
temporary regulations is Edwin B.
Cleverdon, Office of the Assistant Chief
Counsel (Income Tax and Accounting).
However, personnel from other offices of
the IRS and Treasury Department partici-
pated in their development.
* * * * *
Adoption of Amendments to the
Regulations
Accordingly, 26 CFR parts 1 and 602
are amended as follows:
PART 1—INCOME TAXES
Paragraph 1. The authority citation for
part 1 is amended by adding an entry to
read in part as follows:
Authority: 26 U.S.C. 7805 * * *
Section 1.274–5 also issued under 26
U.S.C. 274(d). * * *
Par. 2. Section 1.62–2 is amended by:
1. Revising paragraph (e)(2).
2. Removing the last two sentences of
paragraph (m).
3. Adding a sentence to the end of
paragraph (m).
The revision and addition read as fol-
lows:
§1.62–2 Reimbursement and other ex-
pense allowance arrangements.
* * * * *
(e) * * *
(2) Expenses governed by section
274(d). An arrangement that reimburses
travel, entertainment, use of a passenger
automobile or other listed property, or
other business expenses governed by sec-
tion 274(d) meets the requirements of
this paragraph (e)(2) if information suffi-
cient to satisfy the substantiation require-
ments of section 274(d) and the regula-
tions thereunder is submitted to the
payor. See §1.274–5. Under section
274(d), information sufficient to substan-
tiate the requisite elements of each ex-
penditure or use must be submitted to the
payor. For example, with respect to
travel away from home, §1.274–5(b)(2)
requires that information sufficient to
substantiate the amount, time, place, and
business purpose of the expense must be
submitted to the payor. Similarly, with
respect to use of a passenger automobile
or other listed property, §1.274–5(b)(6)
requires that information sufficient to
substantiate the amount, time, use, and
business purpose of the expense must be
submitted to the payor. See §1.274–5(g),
however, which grants the Commissioner
authority to prescribe rules permitting the
amount of certain expenses to be deemed
substantiated to the payor (in lieu of sub-
stantiating the actual amount of such ex-
penses) by means of per diem or mileage
rates for travel away from home or trans-
portation expenses. See also
§1.274–5(j)(1), which grants the Com-
missioner the authority to establish a
method under which a taxpayer may use
a specified amount for meals while trav-
eling away from home in lieu of substan-
tiating the actual cost of meals, and
§1.274–5(j)(2), which grants the Com-
missioner the authority to establish a
method under which a taxpayer may use
mileage rates to determine the amount of
the ordinary and necessary expenses of
using a vehicle for local transportation
and transportation to, from, and at the
destination while traveling away from
home in lieu of substantiating the actual
costs. Substantiation of the amount of a
business expense in accordance with
rules prescribed pursuant to the authority
granted by §1.274–5(g) or (j) will be
treated as substantiation of the amount of
such expense for purposes of this section.
* * * * *
(m) * * * Paragraph (e)(2) of this sec-
tion applies to payments made under re-
2000–7 I.R.B.615February 14, 2000

imbursement or other expense allowance
arrangements received by an employee
with respect to expenses paid or incurred
after December 31, 1997.
§1.62–2T [REMOVED]
Par. 3. Section 1.62–2T is removed.
Par. 4. Section 1.274–5 is added to
read as follows:
§1.274–5 Substantiation requirements.
(a) and (b) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see §1.274–5T(a) and (b).
(c) Rules of substantiation—(1) [Re-
served]. For further guidance, see
§1.274–5T(c)(1).
(2) Substantiation by adequate
records—(i) and (ii) [Reserved]. For fur-
ther guidance, see §1.274–5T(c)(2)(i) and
(ii).
(iii) Documentary evidence—(A) Ex-
cept as provided in paragraph
(c)(2)(iii)(B), documentary evidence,
such as receipts, paid bills, or similar evi-
dence sufficient to support an expendi-
ture, is required for–
(1) Any expenditure for lodging while
traveling away from home, and
(2) Any other expenditure of $75 or
more except, for transportation charges,
documentary evidence will not be re-
quired if not readily available.
(B) The Commissioner, in his or her
discretion, may prescribe rules waiving
the documentary evidence requirements
in circumstances where it is impracticable
for such documentary evidence to be re-
quired. Ordinarily, documentary evi-
dence will be considered adequate to sup-
port an expenditure if it includes
sufficient information to establish the
amount, date, place, and the essential
character of the expenditure. For exam-
ple, a hotel receipt is sufficient to support
expenditures for business travel if it con-
tains the following: name, location, date,
and separate amounts for charges such as
for lodging, meals, and telephone. Simi-
larly, a restaurant receipt is sufficient to
support an expenditure for a business
meal if it contains the following: name
and location of the restaurant, the date
and amount of the expenditure, the num-
ber of people served, and, if a charge is
made for an item other than meals and
beverages, an indication that such is the
case. A document may be indicative of
only one (or part of one) element of an ex-
penditure. Thus, a cancelled check, to-
gether with a bill from the payee, ordinar-
ily would establish the element of cost. In
contrast, a cancelled check drawn payable
to a named payee would not by itself sup-
port a business expenditure without other
evidence showing that the check was used
for a certain business purpose.
(iv) and (v) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see §1.274–5T(c)(2)(iv) and
(v).
(d) and (e) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see §1.274–5T(d) and (e).
(f) Reporting and substantiation of ex-
penses of certain employees for travel,
entertainment, gifts, and with respect to
listed property—(1) through (3) [Re-
served]. For further guidance, see
§1.274–5T(f)(1) through (3).
(4) Definition of an adequate account-
ing to the employer–(i) In general. For
purposes of this paragraph (f) an adequate
accountingmeans the submission to the
employer of an account book, diary, log,
statement of expense, trip sheet, or similar
record maintained by the employee in
which the information as to each element
of an expenditure or use (described in
paragraph (b) of this section) is recorded
at or near the time of the expenditure or
use, together with supporting documen-
tary evidence, in a manner that conforms
to all the adequate records requirements
of paragraph (c)(2) of this section. An ad-
equate accounting requires that the em-
ployee account for all amounts received
from the employer during the taxable year
as advances, reimbursements, or al-
lowances (including those charged di-
rectly or indirectly to the employer
through credit cards or otherwise) for
travel, entertainment, gifts, and the use of
listed property. The methods of substanti-
ation allowed under paragraph (c)(4) or
(c)(5) of this section also will be consid-
ered to be an adequate accounting if the
employer accepts an employee’s substan-
tiation and establishes that such substanti-
ation meets the requirements of paragraph
(c)(4) or (c)(5). For purposes of an ade-
quate accounting, the method of substan-
tiation allowed under paragraph (c)(3) of
this section will not be permitted.
(ii) Procedures for adequate account-
ing without documentary evidence.The
Commissioner may, in his or her discre-
tion, prescribe rules under which an em-
ployee may make an adequate accounting
to an employer by submitting an account
book, log, diary, etc., alone, without sub-
mitting documentary evidence.
(iii) Employer. For purposes of this
section, the term employerincludes an
agent of the employer or a third party
payor who pays amounts to an employee
under a reimbursement or other expense
allowance arrangement.
(5) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see §1.274–5T(f)(5).
(g) Substantiation by reimbursement
arrangements or per diem, mileage, and
other traveling allowances—(1) In gen-
eral. The Commissioner may, in his or
her discretion, prescribe rules in pro-
nouncements of general applicability
under which allowances for expenses de-
scribed in paragraph (g)(2) of this section
will, if in accordance with reasonable
business practice, be regarded as equiva-
lent to substantiation by adequate records
or other sufficient evidence, for purposes
of paragraph (c) of this section, of the
amount of the expenses and as satisfying,
with respect to the amount of the ex-
penses, the requirements of an adequate
accounting to the employer for purposes
of paragraph (f)(4) of this section. If the
total allowance received exceeds the de-
ductible expenses paid or incurred by the
employee, such excess must be reported
as income on the employee’s return. See
paragraph (j)(1) of this section relating to
the substantiation of meal expenses while
traveling away from home, and paragraph
(j)(2) of this section relating to the sub-
stantiation of expenses for the business
use of a vehicle.
(2) Allowances for expenses described.
An allowance for expenses is described in
this paragraph (g)(2) if it is a—
(i) Reimbursement arrangement cover-
ing ordinary and necessary expenses of
traveling away from home (exclusive of
transportation expenses to and from desti-
nation);
(ii) Per diem allowance providing for
ordinary and necessary expenses of trav-
eling away from home (exclusive of
transportation costs to and from destina-
tion); or
(iii) Mileage allowance providing for
ordinary and necessary expenses of local
transportation and transportation to, from,
and at the destination while traveling
away from home.
(h) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see §1.274–5T(h).
February 14, 20006162000–7 I.R.B.

(i) [Reserved].
(j) Authority for optional methods of
computing certain expenses—(1) Meal
expenses while traveling away from
home. The Commissioner may establish a
method under which a taxpayer may use a
specified amount or amounts for meals
while traveling away from home in lieu of
substantiating the actual cost of meals.
The taxpayer will not be relieved of the
requirement to substantiate the actual cost
of other travel expenses as well as the
time, place, and business purpose of the
travel. See paragraphs(b)(2) and (c) of
this section.
(2) Use of mileage rates for vehicle ex-
penses. The Commissioner may establish
a method under which a taxpayer may use
mileage rates to determine the amount of
the ordinary and necessary expenses of
using a vehicle for local transportation
and transportation to, from, and at the
destination while traveling away from
home in lieu of substantiating the actual
costs. The method may include appropri-
ate limitations and conditions in order to
reflect more accurately vehicle expenses
over the entire period of usage. The tax-
payer will not be relieved of the require-
ment to substantiate the amount of each
business use (i.e., the business mileage),
or the time and business purpose of each
use. See paragraphs (b)(2) and (c) of this
section.
(k) and (l) [Reserved]. For further
guidance, see §1.274–5T(k) and (l).
(m) Effective date. This section applies
to expenses paid or incurred after Decem-
ber 31, 1997.
Par. 5. Section 1.274–5T is amended
by:
1. Revising paragraphs (c)(2)(iii),
(f)(4), (g) and (j).
2. Adding a sentence at the end of
paragraph (m).
The revision and addition read as fol-
lows:
§1.274–5T Substantiation requirements.
* * * * *
(c) * * *
(2) * * *
(iii) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see §1.274–5(c)(2)(iii).
* * * * *
(f)* * *
(4) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see §1.274–5(f)(4).
* * * * *
(g) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see §1.274–5(g).
* * * * *
(j) [Reserved]. For further guidance,
see §1.274–5(j).
* * * * *
(m) Effective date. * * * Paragraphs
(c)(2)(iii), (f)(4), (g), and (j) of this sec-
tion apply to expenses paid or incurred
after December 31, 1997.
§1.274(d)–1 [REMOVED]
Par. 6. Section 1.274(d)–1 is removed.
§1.274(d)–1T [REMOVED]
Par. 7. Section 1.274(d)–1T is re-
moved.
PART 602—OMB CONTROL
NUMBERS UNDER THE
PAPERWORK REDUCTION ACT
Par. 8. The authority citation for part
602 continues to read as follows:
Authority: 26 U.S.C. 7805.
Par. 9. In §602.101, paragraph (b) is
amended by adding the following entry to
the table:
§602.101 OMB Control numbers
* * * * *
(b) * * *
Robert E. Wenzel,
Deputy Commissioner
of Internal Revenue.
Approved December 28, 1999.
Jonathan Talisman,
Acting Assistant Secretary
of the Treasury.
(Filed by the Office of the Federal Register on Janu-
ary 21, 2000, 3:09 p.m., and published in the issue of
the Federal Register for January 26, 2000, 65 F.R.
4121)
2000–7 I.R.B.617February 14, 2000
CFR part or section whereCurrent OMB
identified and describedcontrol No.
* * * * *
§1.274–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1545-0771
* * * * *
Section 401.—Qualified
Pension, Profit-Sharing, Stock
Bonus Plans, etc.
26 CFR 1.401(k)–1: Certain cash or deferred
arrangements.
Cash or deferred arrangements;
elective deferrals. This ruling specifies
the criteria to be met in order to automati-
cally reduce an employee’s compensation
by a certain amount and have that amount
contributed as an elective deferral to an
employer’s section 401(k) plan.
Rev. Rul. 2000–8
ISSUE
Will employer contributions to a profit-
sharing plan fail to be considered elective
contributions, within the meaning of
§ 1.401(k)–1(g)(3) of the Income Tax
Regulations, made under a qualified cash
or deferred arrangement, within the
meaning of § 401(k) of the Internal Rev-
enue Code, merely because they are made
pursuant to an arrangement under which a
fixed percentage of an employee’s com-
pensation is contributed to the plan unless
the employee affirmatively elects to re-
ceive the amount in cash?
FACTS
Situation 1
Employer X maintains Plan A, a profit-
sharing plan intended to satisfy the re-
quirements of § 401(a), including
§§ 401(k) and 401(m), and maintained on
a calendar-year basis. Under Plan A, any
employee of Employer X, including a
newly hired employee, may elect to have
Employer X make contributions on the
employee’s behalf to Plan A in lieu of re-

ceiving that amount as cash compensation
that would otherwise be payable to the
employee. The employee may designate
the amount of these compensation reduc-
tion contributions as a percentage of the
employee’s compensation, subject to cer-
tain limitations set forth in the plan.
Under Plan A, if a newly hired em-
ployee does not affirmatively elect to re-
ceive cash or have a specified amount
contributed to Plan A, his or her compen-
sation is automatically reduced by 3 per-
cent and this amount is contributed to
Plan A. An election by any employee not
to make compensation reduction contri-
butions or to contribute a different per-
centage of compensation can be made at
any time. The election is effective for the
first pay period and subsequent pay peri-
ods (until superseded by a subsequent
election) if filed when the employee is
hired or if filed within a reasonable period
thereafter ending before the compensation
for the first pay period is currently avail-
able. Thus, if an employee files an elec-
tion to receive cash in lieu of compensa-
tion reduction contributions and the
election is filed when the employee is
hired or within a reasonable period there-
after ending before the compensation is
currently available, then no compensation
reduction contributions for the first pay
period or subsequent pay periods are
made on the employee’s behalf to Plan A
until the employee makes a subsequent
affirmative election to reduce his or her
compensation. Elections filed at a later
date are effective for payroll periods be-
ginning in the month next following the
date the election is filed.
At the time an employee is hired, the
employee receives a notice that explains
the automatic compensation reduction
election and the employee’s right to elect
to have no such compensation reduction
contributions made to the plan or to alter
the amount of those contributions, includ-
ing the procedure for exercising that right
and the timing for implementation of any
such election. Each participant in Plan A
is notified annually of his or her compen-
sation reduction percentage and the par-
ticipant’s right to change the percentage,
including the procedure for exercising
that right and the timing for implementa-
tion of any such election.
Plan A provides that compensation re-
duction contributions are immediately
nonforfeitable and, if the employee has
not attained age 59 1/2, cannot be distrib-
uted prior to the employee’s retirement,
death, or separation from service, except
in the case of hardship (as defined in the
plan). Plan A also provides that, for each
employee who has at least 1 year of ser-
vice, Employer X will make matching
contributions to Plan A on account of the
employee’s compensation reduction con-
tributions up to a specified percentage of
the employee’s compensation. Plan A
does not permit after-tax employee contri-
butions.
Plan A provides that both matching
contributions and compensation reduc-
tion contributions will be invested in ac-
cordance with the participant’s election
among a broad range of investment
funds held by the trustee or, if no invest-
ment election is made by the participant,
in the trust’s balanced fund which in-
cludes both diversified equity and fixed
income investments.
1
Situation 2
The facts are the same as in Situation
1, except Plan A is amended, effective
the next January 1, to apply the same
rule to both current and newly hired em-
ployees. Thus, under Plan A as
amended, if an employee hired before
January 1 who has not elected compen-
sation reduction contributions of at least
3 percent of compensation does not affir-
matively elect during a specified reason-
able period ending on the January 1 ef-
fective date to receive cash or have a
specified amount contributed to Plan A,
his or her compensation is automatically
reduced by 3 percent and this amount is
contributed to Plan A beginning the first
pay period that begins after the January 1
effective date.
Under the terms of Plan A as
amended, if a current employee files an
election to receive cash in lieu of com-
pensation reduction contributions and
the election is filed during the reason-
able period ending on the January 1 ef-
fective date, then no compensation re-
duction contributions for the first pay
period beginning on or after the January
1 effective date or for subsequent pay
periods are made on the employee’s be-
half to Plan A until the employee makes
a subsequent affirmative election to re-
duce his or her compensation. In the
case of a current employee who has a
compensation reduction contribution
election in effect for less than 3 percent,
who does not make a new compensation
reduction contribution election during
the reasonable period ending on the Jan-
uary 1 effective date, and whose com-
pensation is therefore automatically re-
duced by 3 percent beginning on that
January 1, if that employee thereafter
makes an affirmative election to reduce
his or her compensation by another
amount (or no amount), then that affir-
mative election will continue in effect
until the employee makes a subsequent
affirmative election for a different
amount.
At the beginning of the reasonable pe-
riod ending on the January 1 effective
date, each current employee receives a
notice that explains the new automatic
compensation reduction election and the
employee’s right to elect to have no such
compensation reduction contributions
made to the plan or to alter the amount of
those contributions, including the proce-
dure for exercising that right and the tim-
ing for implementation of any such elec-
tion. Thereafter, each employee receives
the annual notice described above in Sit-
uation 1.
LAW AND ANALYSIS
Section 401(k) provides that a profit-
sharing or stock bonus plan, a pre-
ERISA money purchase plan, or a rural
cooperative plan can meet the require-
ments of § 401(a) even if it includes a
qualified cash or deferred arrangement.
Section 401(k) also sets forth the re-
quirements that a cash or deferred
arrangement must satisfy in order to be a
qualified cash or deferred arrangement.
Section 1.401(k)–1(a)(2)(i) defines a
February 14, 20006182000–7 I.R.B.
1
The Department of Labor has advised Treasury and
the Service that, under Title I of the Employee
Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (ERISA),
fiduciaries of a plan must ensure that the plan is
administered prudently and solely in the interest of
plan participants and beneficiaries. While ERISA
§ 404(c) may serve to relieve certain fiduciaries
from liability when participants or beneficiaries
exercise control over the assets in their individual
accounts, the Department of Labor has taken the
position that a participant or beneficiary will not be
considered to have exercised control when the par-
ticipant or beneficiary is merely apprised of invest-
ments that will be made on his or her behalf in the
absence of instructions to the contrary. See 29 CFR
§ 2550.404c-1 and 57 F.R. 46924.

cash or deferred arrangement as an
arrangement under which an eligible em-
ployee may make a cash or deferred
election with respect to contributions to,
or accruals or other benefits under, a
plan that is intended to satisfy the re-
quirements of § 401(a). Section
1.401(k)–1(a)(2)(ii) provides that a cash
or deferred arrangement does not include
an arrangement under which amounts
contributed under a plan at an em-
ployee’s election are designated or
treated at the time of contribution as
after-tax employee contributions.
Section 1.401(k)–1(a)(3)(i) defines a
cash or deferred election as any election
(or modification of an earlier election) by
an employee to have the employer either
provide an amount to the employee in the
form of cash (or some other taxable bene-
fit) that is not currently available or con-
tribute an amount to a trust (or provide an
accrual or other benefit) under a plan de-
ferring the receipt of compensation. Sec-
tion 1.401(k)1(a)(3)(iv) provides that a
cash or deferred election does not include
a one-time irrevocable election, made at
the time an employee commences em-
ployment with the employer or upon the
employee’s first becoming eligible under
any plan of the employer, to have contri-
butions made by the employer on the em-
ployee’s behalf to the plan (or to any other
plan of the employer) equal to a specified
amount or percentage of the employee’s
compensation.
Section 1.401(k)–1(e)(2) provides
generally that a qualified cash or de-
ferred arrangement must provide that the
amount that each eligible employee may
defer as an elective contribution is avail-
able to the employee in cash.
Section 1.401(k)–1(g)(3) defines elec-
tive contributions as employer contribu-
tions made to a plan that were subject to
a cash or deferred election under a cash
or deferred arrangement. Such contribu-
tions are elective contributions without
regard to whether the cash or deferred
arrangement is a qualified cash or de-
ferred arrangement.
The definition of a cash or deferred
election in § 1.401(k)–1(a)(3)(i) re-
quires that the employee have an elec-
tion between the employer paying cash
(or some other taxable benefit) to the
employee or making a contribution to a
trust on behalf of the employee. The
regulation does not require that the em-
ployee receive an amount in cash in any
case in which the employee does not
make an affirmative election to have
that amount contributed to the trust.
Thus, a cash or deferred election will
not fail to be made under a qualified
cash or deferred arrangement merely be-
cause, when an employee fails to make
an affirmative election with respect to
an amount of compensation, that amount
is contributed on the employee’s behalf
to a trust, provided that the employee
had an effective opportunity to elect to
receive that amount in cash. The em-
ployee has an effective opportunity to
elect to receive an amount in cash as re-
quired under § 1.401(k)–1(a)(3)(i) if the
employee receives notice of the avail-
ability of the election and the employee
has a reasonable period before the cash
is currently available to make the elec-
tion.
If Plan A were to permit after-tax em-
ployee contributions, then the amounts
contributed to the plan would have to be
designated or treated, at the time of the
contribution, as pre-tax compensation re-
duction contributions or after-tax em-
ployee contributions.
In Situation 1, compensation reduction
contributions made by Employer X to
Plan A, including those made on behalf of
a newly hired employee who has not filed
an election to the contrary, are amounts
contributed pursuant to a procedure under
which the employee receives a notice ex-
plaining his or her rights to have no com-
pensation reduction contributions made
and, after receiving the notice, the em-
ployee has a reasonable period before the
cash is currently available to elect to re-
ceive the cash in lieu of having it con-
tributed to the plan. Similarly, in Situa-
tion 2, compensation reduction
contributions made by Employer X to
Plan A, including those made on behalf of
a newly hired employee who has not filed
an election to the contrary and those made
on behalf of a current employee who has
elected less than 3 percent compensation
reduction contributions, are amounts con-
tributed pursuant to a procedure under
which the employee receives a notice ex-
plaining his or her rights to have no com-
pensation reduction contributions made
and, after receiving the notice, the em-
ployee has a reasonable period before the
cash is currently available to elect to re-
ceive the cash in lieu of having it con-
tributed to the plan. Thus, in Situation 1
andSituation 2, an eligible employee has
an effective opportunity to elect to receive
cash or have a contribution made to the
plan on the employee’s behalf. In addi-
tion, compensation reduction contribu-
tions made under the plan are not contri-
butions made pursuant to a one-time
irrevocable election because the em-
ployee can change the election in the fu-
ture. Consequently, the compensation re-
duction contributions described in
Situation 1 andSituation 2are made pur-
suant to cash or deferred elections and
satisfy the requirement in
§ 1.401(k)–1(a)(3)(i) that the amount that
each eligible employee may defer as an
elective contribution be available to the
employee in cash. The result would be
the same if the plan required a period of
service (permitted under § 401(k)(2)(D))
before an employee became eligible for
elective contributions.
HOLDING
Where, as in Situation 1 andSituation
2, a newly hired or a current employee
has an effective opportunity to elect to
receive an amount in cash or have that
amount contributed by the employer to a
profit-sharing plan, those employer con-
tributions made on the employee’s behalf
to the plan in lieu of receipt of cash com-
pensation will not fail to be considered
elective contributions within the mean-
ing of § 1.401(k)–1(g)(3) made under a
qualified cash or deferred arrangement
within the meaning of § 401(k) merely
because they are made pursuant to an
arrangement under which, in any case in
which an employee does not affirma-
tively elect to receive cash, the em-
ployee’s compensation is reduced by a
fixed percentage and that amount is con-
tributed on the employee’s behalf to the
plan.
EFFECT ON OTHER DOCUMENTS
Rev. Rul. 98–30, 1998–25 I.R.B. 8, is
amplified and superseded.
PAPERWORK REDUCTION ACT
The collection of information con-
tained in this revenue ruling has been re-
viewed and approved by the Office of
2000–7 I.R.B.619February 14, 2000

February 14, 20006202000–7 I.R.B.
Management and Budget (OMB) in ac-
cordance with the Paperwork Reduction
Act (44 U.S.C. 3507) under control num-
ber 1545-1605.
An agency may not conduct or spon-
sor, and a person is not required to re-
spond to, a collection of information un-
less the collection of information
displays a valid OMB control number.
The collections of information in this
revenue ruling are in the third, sixth, and
last paragraphs in the section headed
“FACTS” and in the sixth paragraph in
the section headed “LAW AND ANALY-
SIS.” The collections of information are
required to enable personnel in the Tax
Exempt and Government Entities Divi-
sion of the Internal Revenue Service to
determine if an employer’s retirement
plan satisfies the requirements to obtain
favorable tax treatment and to enable
certain employee elections to meet the
requirements of § 401(k). The collec-
tions of information are required to ob-
tain a benefit. The likely respondents are
businesses or other for-profit institu-
tions, and not-for-profit institutions.
The estimated total annual reporting
burden is 1,750 hours. The estimated av-
erage annual burden per respondent is 1
hour and 10 minutes. The estimated
number of respondents is 1,500. The es-
timated annual frequency of responses is
on occasion.
Books or records relating to a collec-
tion of information must be retained as
long as their contents may become mate-
rial in the administration of any Internal
Revenue law. Generally, tax returns and
tax return information are confidential,
as required by 26 U.S.C. 6103.
DRAFTING INFORMATION
The principal author of this revenue
ruling is Roger Kuehnle of the Tax Ex-
empt and Government Entities Division.
For further information regarding this
revenue ruling, call the Employee Plans’
taxpayer assistance telephone service at
(202) 622-6074/6075 (not toll-free num-
bers) between 1:30 and 3:30 p.m. East-
ern Time, Monday through Thursday.
Section 1296.—Election of Mark to
Market For Marketable Stock
26 CFR 1.1296(e)–1: Definition of marketable stock.
T.D. 8867
DEPARTMENT OF THE TREASURY
Internal Revenue Service
26 CFR Part 1
Passive Foreign Investment
Companies; Definition of
Marketable Stock
AGENCY: Internal Revenue Service
(IRS), Treasury.
ACTION: Final Regulations.
SUMMARY: This document contains
final regulations under section 1296 relat-
ing to the new mark-to-market election
for stock of a passive foreign investment
company (PFIC). The final regulations
interpret changes made by the Taxpayer
Relief Act of 1997. The final regulations
affect persons holding PFIC stock that is
regularly traded on certain U.S. or foreign
exchanges or markets or holding stock in
certain PFICs comparable to U.S. regu-
lated investment companies (RICs).
DATES: Effective Date: January 25,
2000.
Applicability Dates: For dates of ap-
plicability see section 1.1296(e)–1(g) of
these regulations.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT: Robert Laudeman, (202) 622-
3840 (not a toll-free number).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Background
On February 2, 1999, the IRS pub-
lished in the Federal Registerproposed
regulations (REG-113744-98, 1999–10
I.R.B. 59, [64 F.R. 5014]) regarding the
taxation of U.S. holders of PFIC stock.
Three written comments regarding the
proposed regulations were received. Be-
cause no one requested to speak at a pub-
lic hearing, no hearing was held. After
consideration of all of the comments re-
ceived, the proposed regulations under
section 1296 are adopted as final regula-
tions with some changes. The changes
are discussed below.
The preamble to the proposed regula-
tions (64 F.R. 5014) provides a detailed
discussion of the mark-to-market election
for shareholders of PFIC stock and the
proposed regulations.
Summary of Public Comments and
Changes
Exchange or Other Market
The proposed regulations require that a
foreign exchange or market be regulated
or supervised by a governmental authority
of the country in which the market is lo-
cated. The proposed regulations also list
additional characteristics that the foreign
exchange or market must have for stock
that is regularly traded on the exchange or
market to be marketable stock for pur-
poses of section 1296. Specifically, the
proposed regulations require that the ex-
change have trading volume, listing, fi-
nancial disclosure and other requirements
designed to prevent fraud, perfect the
mechanism of a free and open market,
and protect investors.
The final regulations add a surveillance
requirement and add the concept of perfect-
ing a fair and orderly market to the require-
ments for exchanges. These changes are
intended to clarify the characteristics that
an exchange or other market must have in
order to be a qualified exchange or market
for purposes of section 1296 and to more
closely represent common characteristics
of foreign markets. See International Fed-
eration of Stock Exchanges (FIBV), 1998
Market Principles, available by request
from secretariat@fibv.com, and Interna-
tional Organization of Securities Commis-
sions (IOSCO), Supervisory Framework
for Markets, Report by the Technical Com-
mittee, May 1999 (visited Oct. 5, 1999)
<http://www.iosco.org/iosco.html>.
Stock in Certain PFICs
The proposed regulations provide that
stock in certain PFICs is marketable stock
if the PFIC both is a corporation de-
scribed in section 1296(e)(1)(B) (foreign
corporations comparable to RICs) and of-
fers for sale or has outstanding stock of
which it is the issuer and which is re-
deemable at its net asset value. The pro-
posed regulations further provide that a
PFIC is a corporation described in section
1296(e)(1)(B) only if the PFIC satisfies
eight conditions listed in the proposed
regulations with respect to the class of
shares held by the electing taxpayer. The
conditions are intended to describe PFICs
that are comparable to RICs in relevant
respects and to implement the intent of

the statute by ensuring that the net asset
valuations of such companies represent
legitimate and sound fair market values
for the companies’ stock.
Two commentators asserted that the
statute and legislative history indicate that
Congress was only concerned that PFICs
redeem stock at net asset values and that
such values represent sound and legiti-
mate fair market values and, therefore, it
is not necessary that the PFIC resemble a
RIC. The commentators suggest that the
regulations be modified to include PFICs
that redeem their stock at its net asset
value but do not otherwise resemble
RICs. Because the plain language of the
statute clearly requires that the stock in
any foreign corporation be comparable to
a RIC, the final regulations retain the ap-
proach of requiring PFICs to be compara-
ble to RICs in order for their stock to be
marketable stock for purposes of section
1296(e)(1)(B).
The proposed regulations provide that
a foreign corporation must have one hun-
dred or more unrelated shareholders.
One commentator recommended that the
number be reduced to ten unrelated
shareholders, arguing that a corporation
with ten unrelated shareholders as op-
posed to one hundred unrelated share-
holders has the same susceptibility to
legal liabilities if valuations are inaccu-
rate. Requiring that a PFIC have one
hundred or more unrelated shareholders
is comparable to the requirement im-
posed on RICs by section 851(a). In ad-
dition, the IRS and the Treasury Depart-
ment believe that there will be less
likelihood of share price manipulation
with corporations that have one hundred
or more unrelated shareholders. Conse-
quently, the above described rule in the
proposed regulations is not changed ex-
cept that “one hundred or more” is cor-
rected to read “more than one hundred”
unrelated shareholders.
The proposed regulations require that
the class of shares of the foreign corpo-
ration be readily available for purchase
by the general public at its net asset
value by new investors in initial amounts
not greater than $10,000 (U.S.). One
commentator recommended that this
condition not be included in the final
regulations because an investment ceil-
ing will not make the valuation easier or
less likely to be manipulated.
The condition in the proposed regula-
tions regarding initial investments is not
an investment ceiling. Rather, the condi-
tion specifies that the foreign corporation
not require a minimum initial investment
of greater than $10,000 (U.S.) and that
shares of the foreign corporation be read-
ily available for purchase by the general
public at net asset values. For example, a
foreign corporation that requires new in-
vestors to purchase shares for a minimum
initial investment of $5,000 (U.S.) satis-
fies the condition. However, a foreign
corporation that requires new investors to
purchase shares for a minimum initial in-
vestment of $20,000 (U.S.) does not sat-
isfy the condition. There is not any limit,
however, on the total amount that a share-
holder can invest. The final regulations
clarify that this condition is not an invest-
ment ceiling.
Two additional requirements in the
proposed regulations are that shares be
available for purchase by the general
public and that, no less frequently than
annually, financial statements prepared
by independent auditors be available to
the public. One commentator asserted
that availability to the general public of
the shares of the foreign corporation and
of the financial statements is not neces-
sary and should not be required because
it will not necessarily ensure a legitimate
and sound fair market value for the for-
eign corporation’s stock.
Availability of shares for purchase by
the general public is comparable to the
requirement of availability of shares of
RICs for purchase by the general public.
In addition, availability of shares for
purchase by the the general public for
net asset value (in addition to current in-
vestors being able to redeem shares for
the same net asset value), will ensure
that the net asset values are legitimate
and sound. However, shares will not be
considered available for purchase by the
general public if the shares are only
available to individuals with high annual
incomes or high net worth. For example,
limiting investors to individuals with an-
nual incomes in excess of $200,000 or
net worth in excess of $1 million will not
be considered available for purchase by
the general public.
Similarly, availability to the general
public of audited financial statements is
comparable to conditions imposed on
RICs and will help to ensure that the for-
eign corporation’s financial information
is readily available to potential and cur-
rent investors, which, in turn, will help
ensure that the net asset values are legiti-
mate and sound. Availability of financial
statements to the general public requires
no more than that the statements be
available upon request to potential and
current investors.
The proposed regulations require that
quotations for the shares of the foreign
corporation be determined and published
on a daily basis in a widely-available
medium, such as a newspaper of general
circulation. One commentator asserted
that the condition is not necessary be-
cause the mark-to-market election is
made on an annual basis at the close of
the taxpayer’s taxable year. The com-
mentator recommended that the condi-
tion be changed to require that values be
communicated to shareholders, on at
least an annual basis, in written form that
serves as support for such valuation.
The final regulations do not adopt the
commentator’s recommendation. The
publication of quotations for the shares
is not intended to serve solely as a means
for a current shareholder of the PFIC to
determine the value of the PFIC on the
mark date. The publication of quotations
for the shares is comparable to the prac-
tice of RICs and helps to ensure that
asset valuations are legitimate and sound
by allowing potential investors as well as
current shareholders to have ready ac-
cess to price information.
Because quotations for the shares of
some PFICs may not be published on a
daily basis, the daily publication require-
ment in the proposed regulations is
changed to require that quotations for the
shares of the foreign corporation be de-
termined and published no less fre-
quently than weekly. In addition, the
publication requirement is changed to
clarify that the quotations must be pub-
lished in a permanent medium not con-
trolled by the issuer of the shares, such
as an independent trade publication.
The requirement that the medium be per-
manent does not require the medium to
be saved in a printed form; archived
electronic data not susceptible to subse-
quent alteration are permanent. This
change is intended to assist shareholders
and the IRS in verifying valuations.
2000–7 I.R.B.621February 14, 2000

The proposed regulations require that
the foreign corporation be supervised or
regulated as an investment company by a
foreign government or instrumentality
thereof. One commentator suggested
that the condition be clarified with re-
spect to the meaning of governmental su-
pervision. In particular, the commenta-
tor asks whether a foreign jurisdiction
that requires a local corporation to file
information upon incorporation with the
local government or agency would qual-
ify as supervision or regulation.
The condition in the proposed regula-
tions is intended to require that the PFIC
be supervised or regulated as an invest-
ment company in a manner comparable,
but not identical, to RICs. Consequently,
the final regulations clarify the type of
supervision or regulation required. The
final regulations provide that sufficient
supervision or regulation requires that
the government or agency have broad in-
spection and enforcement authority and
effective oversight over investment com-
panies to ensure that such companies
provide complete and accurate disclo-
sure of relevant financial information to
shareholders and potential investors and
to provide adequate sanctions for false or
inadequate disclosure. The mere filing
of information upon incorporation does
not qualify as supervision or regulation.
Finally, the proposed regulations re-
quire that the foreign corporation have
no senior securities authorized or out-
standing, including any debt other than
de minimis amounts. In addition, the
proposed regulations require that the for-
eign corporation meet the PFIC income
and asset tests in sections 1297(a)(1) and
(2) with the requisite percentages in-
creased from 75 percent to 90 percent
and from 50 percent to 90 percent re-
spectively. One commentator asserted
that these conditions not be included in
the final regulations because there is no
basis for requiring a PFIC to have the
same borrowing restrictions, asset com-
position, and characteristics of RICs in
order for the PFIC’s stock to be mar-
ketable stock under section 1296.
Conditions regarding debt and asset
composition are essential characteristics of
RICs. The IRS and the Treasury Depart-
ment believe that Congress intended to pro-
vide mark-to-market treatment to shares of
PFICs that are, in fact, comparable to RICs.
Special Rules for RICs
The proposed regulations provide that
if shares in a PFIC are owned directly or
indirectly by a RIC, that is offering for
sale, or has outstanding any stock of
which it is the issuer, and which is re-
deemable at net asset value, the PFIC
shares shall be treated as marketable stock
for purposes of section 1296. Section
1296(e)(2) further provides that except as
provided in regulations, similar treatment
as marketable stock shall apply in the case
of any other RIC which publishes net
asset valuations at least annually. The
IRS and Treasury Department invited
comments regarding situations where
PFIC stock held by other RICs that pub-
lish asset valuations at least annually
should not be treated as marketable stock
for purposes of section 1296.
One commentator explained why PFIC
stock held by any closed-end RIC that
publishes net asset values at least annu-
ally should be treated as marketable
stock. In particular, that commentator
pointed out that closed-end RICs are sub-
ject to many of the same regulatory re-
quirements as open-end RICs. In addi-
tion, that commentator explained that an
industry practice has developed under
which closed-end RICs typically deter-
mine and publish current share prices, to-
gether with net asset values, on a weekly
basis in print and other media.
At this time, the IRS and Treasury De-
partment know of no reason not to treat
PFIC stock held by closed-end funds that
publish net asset values at least annually
as marketable stock. Consequently, as
provided by section 1296(e)(2), PFIC
stock held by any closed-end RIC that
publishes net asset values at least annu-
ally shall be treated as marketable stock.
The final regulations, however, continue
to reserve this issue in the event that it is
determined that situations exist where
PFIC stock held by closed-end RICs that
publish net asset valuations at least annu-
ally should not be treated as marketable
stock for purposes of section 1296. If
such a situation is found to exist, the
reservation will be replaced at that time
by a new regulatory exception.
Special Analyses
It has been determined that these regula-
tions are not significant regulatory actions
as defined in EO 12866. Therefore, a regu-
latory assessment is not required. It also
has been determined that section 553(b) of
the Administrative Procedure Act (5 U.S.C.
chapter 5) does not apply to these regula-
tions, and, because the regulations do not
impose a requirement for the collection of
information on small entities, the Regula-
tory Flexibility Act (5 U.S.C. chapter 6)
does not apply. Pursuant to section 7805(f)
of the Internal Revenue Code, the notice of
proposed rulemaking preceeding these reg-
ulations was submitted to the Chief Coun-
sel for Advocacy of the Small Business Ad-
ministration for comment on its impact on
small business.
Drafting Information
The principal author of these regula-
tions is Robert Laudeman of the Office of
the Associate Chief Counsel (Interna-
tional). However, other personnel from
the IRS and Treasury Department partici-
pated in their development.
* * * * *
Adoption of Amendments to the
Regulations
Accordingly, 26 CFR part 1 is amended
as follows:
PART 1—INCOME TAXES
Paragraph 1. The authority citation for
part 1 is amended by adding an entry in
numerical order to read as follows:
Authority: 26 U.S.C. 7805 * * *
Section 1.1296(e)–1 also issued under 26
U.S.C. 1296(e). * * *
Par. 2. Section 1.1296(e)–1 is added to
read as follows:
§1.1296(e)–1 Definition of marketable
stock.
(a) General rule. For purposes of sec-
tion 1296, the term marketable stock
means—
(1) Passive foreign investment com-
pany (PFIC) stock that is regularly traded,
as defined in paragraph (b) of this section,
on a qualified exchange or other market,
as defined in paragraph (c) of this section;
(2) Stock in certain PFICs, as described
in paragraph (d) of this section; and
(3) Options on stock that is described in
paragraph (a)(1) or (2) of this section, to
the extent provided in paragraph (e) of
this section.
(b) Regularly traded—(1) General
rule. For purposes of paragraph (a)(1) of
this section, a class of stock that is traded
February 14, 20006222000–7 I.R.B.

on one or more qualified exchanges or
other markets, as defined in paragraph (c)
of this section, is regularly traded on such
exchanges or markets for any calendar
year during which such class of stock is
traded, other than in de minimis quanti-
ties, on at least 15 days during each calen-
dar quarter.
(2) Anti-abuse rule. Trades that have
as one of their principal purposes the
meeting of the trading requirement of
paragraph (b)(1) of this section shall be
disregarded. Further, a class of stock
shall not be treated as meeting the trading
requirement of paragraph (b)(1) of this
section if there is a pattern of trades con-
ducted to meet the requirement of para-
graph (b)(1) of this section.
(c) Qualified exchange or other
market—(1) General rule. For purposes
of paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the
term qualified exchange or other market
means, for any calendar year—
(i) A national securities exchange that
is registered with the Securities and Ex-
change Commission or the national mar-
ket system established pursuant to section
11A of the Securities Exchange Act of
1934 (15 U.S.C. 78f); or
(ii) A foreign securities exchange that is
regulated or supervised by a governmen-
tal authority of the country in which the
market is located and which has the fol-
lowing characteristics—
(A) The exchange has trading volume,
listing, financial disclosure, surveillance,
and other requirements designed to pre-
vent fraudulent and manipulative acts and
practices, to remove impediments to and
perfect the mechanism of a free and open,
fair and orderly, market, and to protect in-
vestors; and the laws of the country in
which the exchange is located and the
rules of the exchange ensure that such re-
quirements are actually enforced; and
(B) The rules of the exchange effectively
promote active trading of listed stocks.
(2) Exchange with multiple tiers. If an
exchange in a foreign country has more
than one tier or market level on which
stock may be separately listed or traded,
each such tier shall be treated as a sepa-
rate exchange.
(d) Stock in certain PFICs—(1) Gen-
eral rule. Except as provided in para-
graph (d)(2) of this section, a foreign cor-
poration is a corporation described in
section 1296(e)(1)(B), and paragraph
(a)(2) of this section, if the foreign corpo-
ration offers for sale or has outstanding
stock of which it is the issuer and which is
redeemable at its net asset value and if the
foreign corporation satisfies the following
conditions with respect to the class of
shares held by the electing taxpayer—
(i) At all times during the calendar year,
the foreign corporation has more than one
hundred shareholders with respect to the
class, other than shareholders who are re-
lated under section 267(b);
(ii) At all times during the calendar
year, the class of shares of the foreign cor-
poration is readily available for purchase
by the general public at its net asset value
and the foreign corporation does not re-
quire a minimum initial investment of
greater than $10,000 (U.S.);
(iii) At all times during the calendar
year, quotations for the class of shares of
the foreign corporation are determined
and published no less frequently than on a
weekly basis in a widely-available perma-
nent medium not controlled by the issuer
of the shares, such as a newspaper of gen-
eral circulation or a trade publication;
(iv) No less frequently than annually, in-
dependent auditors prepare financial state-
ments of the foreign corporation that in-
clude balance sheets (statements of assets,
liabilities, and net assets) and statements of
income and expenses, and those statements
are made available to the public;
(v) The foreign corporation is super-
vised or regulated as an investment com-
pany by a foreign government or an
agency or instrumentality thereof that has
broad inspection and enforcement author-
ity and effective oversight over invest-
ment companies;
(vi) At all times during the calendar
year, the foreign corporation has no senior
securities authorized or outstanding, in-
cluding any debt other than in de minimis
amounts;
(vii) Ninety percent or more of the
gross income of the foreign corporation
for its taxable year is passive income, as
defined in section 1297(a)(1) and the reg-
ulations thereunder; and (viii) The av-
erage percentage of assets held by the for-
eign corporation during its taxable year
which produce passive income or which
are held for the production of passive in-
come, as defined in section 1297(a)(2)
and the regulations thereunder, is at least
90 percent.
(2) Anti-abuse rule. If a foreign corpo-
ration undertakes any actions that have as
one of their principal purposes the ma-
nipulation of the net asset value of a class
of its shares, for the calendar year in
which the manipulation occurs, the shares
are not marketable stock for purposes of
paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
(e) [Reserved]
(f) Special rules for regulated invest-
ment companies (RICs)
—(1) General rule. In the case of any
RIC that is offering for sale, or has out-
standing, any stock of which it is the is-
suer and which is redeemable at net asset
value, if the RIC owns directly or indi-
rectly, as defined in sections 958(a)(1)
and (2), stock in any passive foreign in-
vestment company, that stock will be
treated as marketable stock owned by that
RIC for purposes of section 1296. Except
as provided in paragraph (f)(2) of this sec-
tion, in the case of any other RIC that
publishes net asset valuations at least an-
nually, if the RIC owns directly or indi-
rectly, as defined in sections 958(a)(1)
and (2), stock in any passive foreign in-
vestment company, that stock will be
treated as marketable stock owned by that
RIC for purposes of section 1296.
(2) [Reserved]
(g) Effective date. This section applies
to shareholders whose taxable year ends
on or after January 25, 2000 for stock in a
foreign corporation whose taxable year
ends with or within the shareholder’s tax-
able year. In addition, shareholdersmay
elect to apply these regulations to any tax-
able year beginning after December 31,
1997, for stock in a foreign corporation
whose taxable year ends with or within
the shareholder’s taxable year.
Robert E. Wenzel,
Deputy Commissioner
of Internal Revenue.
Approved January 12, 2000.
Jonathan Talisman,
Acting Assistant Secretary
of the Treasury.
(Filed by the Office of the Federal Register on Janu-
ary 21, 2000, 8:45 a.m., and published in the issue of
the Federal Register for January 25, 2000, 65 F.R.
3817)
2000–7 I.R.B.623February 14, 2000

February 14, 20006242000–7 I.R.B.
Notice of Proposed Rulemaking
and Notice of Public Hearing
Qualified Transportation Fringe
Benefits
REG–113572–99
AGENCY: Internal Revenue Service
ACTION: Notice of proposed rulemaking
and notice of public hearing.
SUMMARY: This document contains
proposed regulations relating to qualified
transportation fringe benefits. These pro-
posed regulations reflect changes to the
law made by the Energy Policy Act of
1992, the Taxpayer Relief Act of 1997,
and the Transportation Equity Act for the
21
st
Century. These proposed regulations
affect employers that offer qualified
transportation fringes and employees who
receive these benefits. This document
also provides notice of a public hearing
on these proposed regulations.
DATES: Written and electronic comments
must be received by April 26, 2000. Out-
lines of topics to be discussed at the public
hearing scheduled for June 1, 2000 at 10
a.m. must be received by May 10, 2000.
ADDRESSES: Send submissions to:
CC:DOM:CORP:R (REG–113572–99),
room 5226, Internal Revenue Service, POB
7604, Ben Franklin Station, Washington,
DC 20044. Submissions may be hand de-
livered Monday through Friday between
the hours of 8 a.m. and 5 p.m. to:
CC:DOM:CORP:R (REG–113572–99),
Courier’s Desk, Internal Revenue Service,
1111 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washing-
ton, DC. Alternatively, taxpayers may sub-
mit comments electronically via the Inter-
net by selecting the “Tax Regs” option on
the IRS Home Page, or by submitting com-
ments directly to the IRS Internet site at
http://www.irs.ustreas.gov/tax_regs/reglist.
html. The public hearing will be held in
room 2615, Internal Revenue Building,
1111 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washing-
ton, DC.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT: Concerning the proposed regula-
tions, John Richards of the Office of As-
sociate Chief Counsel (Employee
Benefits and Exempt Organizations),
(202) 622-6040; concerning submissions
of comments, the hearing and/or to be
placed on the building access list to attend
the hearing, LaNita Van Dyke, (202) 622-
7190 (not toll-free numbers).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
Paperwork Reduction Act
The collections of information con-
tained in this notice of proposed rulemak-
ing have been submitted to the Office of
Management and Budget for review in ac-
cordance with the Paperwork Reduction
Act of 1995 (44 U.S.C. 3507(d)). Com-
ments on the collections of information
should be sent to the Office of Manage-
ment and Budget, Attn: Desk Officer for
the Department of Treasury, Office of In-
formation and Regulatory Affairs, Wash-
ington, DC 20503, with copies to the In-
ternal Revenue Service, Attn: IRS
Reports Clearance Officer, OP:FS:FP,
Washington, DC 20224. Comments on
the collection of information should be re-
ceived by March 27, 2000. Comments
are specifically requested concerning:
Whether the proposed collections of in-
formation are necessary for the proper
performance of the functions of the Inter-
nal Revenue Service, including whether
the information will have practical utility;
The accuracy of the estimated burden as-
sociated with the proposed collections of
information (see below);
How the quality, utility, and clarity of the
information to be collected may be en-
hanced; How the burden of complying
with the proposed collections of informa-
tion may be minimized, including through
the application of automated collection
techniques or other forms of information
technology; and
Estimates of capital or start-up costs and
costs of operation, maintenance, and pur-
chase of service to provide information.
The collections of information in this
proposed regulation are in 26 CFR
1.132–9(b). This information is required
by the Internal Revenue Service to imple-
ment section 132(f). This information will
be used to verify compliance with section
132(f). Section 132(f)(3) provides that
qualified transportation fringes can include
cash reimbursement for qualified trans-
portation fringes. The proposed regulations
require that employers keep records of sub-
stantiation provided by employees in order
to receive cash reimbursement for qualified
transportation fringes. Section 132(f)(4)
provides that an employee may choose be-
tween cash compensation and any qualified
transportation fringe. The proposed regu-
lations require that employers keep records,
in a verifiable form, such as written or elec-
tronic, of employee elections to reduce
compensation. The value of qualified
transportation fringes provided for a month
exceeding the applicable statutory monthly
limit must be reported on the employee’s
Form W-2. The burden for this require-
ment is reflected in the burden for Form W-
2. The likely recordkeepers are employers.
The likely respondents are employees.
Estimated total annual recordkeeping
burden: 7,020,000 hours.
Estimated average annual recordkeep-
ing burden per recordkeeper : The av-
erage annual recordkeeping burden will
vary depending on the size of the em-
ployer. The estimated average annual
recordkeeping burden per recordkeeper
is 26.5 hours.
Estimated number of recordkeepers:
265,343
Estimated total annual reporting bur-
den: 5,948,728 hours
Estimated average annual reporting
burden per respondent: .8 hours.
Estimated number of respondents:
7,264,970
Estimated annual frequency of re-
sponses: Monthly.
An agency may not conduct or sponsor,
and a person is not required to respond to,
a collection of information unless it dis-
plays a valid control number assigned by
the Office of Management and Budget.
Books or records relating to a collection
of information must be retained as long as
their contents may become material in the
administration of any internal revenue
law. Generally, tax returns and tax return
information are confidential, as required
by 26 U.S.C. 6103.
Background
This document contains a proposed
amendment to the Income Tax Regula-
tions (26 CFR part 1) under section
Part IV. Items of General Interest

2000–7 I.R.B.625February 14, 2000
132(f). Congress amended section 132
as part of the Energy Policy Act of
1992, Public Law No. 102-486, section
1911 (106 Stat. 3012), effective after
December 31, 1992. This provision ex-
cludes from gross income the value of
any qualified transportation fringe pro-
vided by an employer to an employee to
the extent it does not exceed the applica-
ble statutory monthly limit.
This 1992 amendment to section 132
resulted in three changes to the tax treat-
ment of employer-provided transporta-
tion benefits. First, Congress added an
exclusion for transportation provided by
an employer to an employee in a com-
muter highway vehicle. Second, mass
transit passes provided by an employer
to an employee became excludable as a
qualified transportation fringe and not as
a de minimis fringe. The exclusions for
transportation provided by an employer
to an employee in a commuter highway
vehicle and mass transit passes were
made subject to an aggregate $60 per
month limit (adjusted for cost of living).
Third, Congress eliminated the working
condition fringe for commuter parking,
imposed a $150 per month limit (ad-
justed for cost of living) for the exclu-
sion for qualified parking, and provided
that employer-provided parking is ex-
cludable from gross income only as a
qualified transportation fringe. The
1992 amendment provided that qualified
transportation fringes could not be pro-
vided in lieu of salary.
Section 1072 of the Taxpayer Relief Act
of 1997 (TRA ‘97), Pub. L. No. 105-34
(111 Stat. 948), amended section 132(f), ef-
fective for tax years beginning after De-
cember 31, 1997, to permit qualified park-
ing to be provided to employees in lieu of
salary. Section 9010 of the Transportation
Equity Act for the 21
st
Century (TEA 21),
Pub. L. No. 105-178 (112 Stat. 507),
amended section 132(f) to increase the
monthly dollar limits to $65 for transporta-
tion in a commuter highway vehicle and
mass transit passes
1
and $175 for qualified
parking and to provide that, effective after
December 31, 1997, any qualified trans-
portation fringe may be provided to em-
ployees in lieu of salary.
Explanation of Provisions
This document contains proposed regu-
lations under section 132. The proposed
regulations provide guidance, in question
and answer form, to employers that pro-
vide qualified transportation fringes to
employees. Qualified transportation
fringes consist of transportation in a com-
muter highway vehicle, any transit pass,
and qualified parking provided by an em-
ployer to an employee.
Notice 94–3, 1994–1 C.B. 327, pro-
vided guidance on qualified transporta-
tion fringes in the form of questions and
answers. The proposed regulations re-
flect statutory changes in section 132(f)
since 1994, including the revised monthly
dollar limits and the use of bona fide
salary reduction arrangements, as permit-
ted under TRA ’97 and TEA 21, and gen-
erally conform with the guidance in No-
tice 94–3. In response to public
comments, the proposed regulations also
provided additional guidance concerning
the standards for determining when the
section 132(f) exclusion applies to cash
reimbursement of transit pass expenses.
Section 132(f) limits the value of quali-
fied transportation fringes that may be ex-
cluded from an employee’s gross income.
The proposed regulations explain that
there are two categories of qualified
transportation fringes for purposes of de-
termining the amount that is excludable
from gross income. The first category is
transportation in a commuter highway ve-
hicle and transit passes. The second cate-
gory is qualified parking. There is a
statutory monthly limit on the value of the
benefits from each category that is ex-
cludable from gross income. For 1999
and 2000, the statutory monthly limit is
$65 for transportation in a commuter
highway vehicle and mass transit passes
and $175 for qualified parking. An em-
ployee may receive benefits from each
category provided the applicable statutory
monthly limit for that category is not ex-
ceeded. The amount by which the value
of qualified transportation fringes pro-
vided by an employer to an employee ex-
ceeds the applicable statutory monthly
limit is included in the employee’s wages
for income and employment tax purposes.
The proposed regulations provide that,
for purposes of valuing qualified parking,
the valuation rules under section
1.61–21(b) generally apply. With respect
to employer-provided van pool benefits,
the regulations provide that an employer
may use the special valuation rules pro-
vided under section 1.61–21(c), (d), (e),
and (f) in valuing these benefits. An exam-
ple in the proposed regulations illustrates
that in determining the value of a transit
pass sold at a discount for purposes of sec-
tion 132(f), the purchase price rather than
the face amount of the transit pass controls.
The proposed regulations reflect that
qualified transportation fringes include
cash reimbursement by an employer to an
employee for expenses incurred by the em-
ployee for transportation in a commuter
highway vehicle and qualified parking.
Section 132(f)(3) provides that qualified
transportation fringes include cash reim-
bursement for a transit pass only if a
voucher or similar item that is exchange-
able for a transit pass is not readily avail-
able for direct distribution by the employer
to the employee. In defining “readily
available,” the regulations reflect the gen-
eral standards set forth in Notice 94–3,
under which an amount is readily available
if an employer can obtain it on terms no
less favorable than those available to an in-
dividual employee and without incurring a
significant administrative cost.
In addition, the proposed regulations
clarify the meaning of “significant adminis-
trative costs.” The proposed regulations
provide that the determination of whether
obtaining a voucher would result in a sig-
nificant administrative cost is made with
respect to each transit system voucher. A
transit system voucher is a voucher that is
accepted by one or more mass transit oper-
ators (e.g., train, subway, and bus) in an
area as fare media (or in exchange for fare
media). The proposed regulations provide
a safe harbor under which administrative
costs are treated as significant if the aver-
age monthly administrative costs incurred
by the employer for a voucher (disregard-
ing delivery charges imposed by the fare
media provider to the extent not in excess
of $15 per order) are more than 1 percent of
the average monthly value of the vouchers
for a system. These standards are intended
to provide clear guidance so that employers
can determine when qualified transporta-
tion fringes include cash reimbursement for
transit passes.
The proposed regulations provide that
1
The dollar limit for transportation in a commuter
highway vehicle and transit passes was further
increased to $100 effective January 1, 2002.

February 14, 20006262000–7 I.R.B.
reimbursements may be made only pur-
suant to a bona fide reimbursement
arrangement. Thus, an employee must
provide substantiation that an expense has
been incurred for qualified transportation
fringes in order to receive a reimburse-
ment. The regulations recognize that the
substantiation requirements vary depend-
ing upon the payment method used to pur-
chase transportation in a commuter high-
way vehicle, mass transit passes, and
qualified parking. The regulations pro-
vide examples of what constitutes reason-
able reimbursement procedures in certain
circumstances. For example, if an em-
ployee uses metered parking, the substan-
tiation requirement may be satisfied if the
employee certifies that the expense was
incurred and the employer has no reason
to believe the employee did not actually
incur the expense.
The proposed regulations provide that
there are no substantiation requirements
with respect to mass transit passes pro-
vided directly by an employer to its em-
ployees. Of course, an employer may im-
pose its own substantiation requirements
in addition to those required under the
regulations.
The proposed regulations follow the
approach taken in Notice 94–3 with re-
spect to taxing the value of employer-pro-
vided parking benefits provided to mem-
bers of car and van pools. The
regulations provide that the “prime mem-
ber” bears the tax consequences with re-
spect to the parking space.
2
The prime
member is the employee to whom the
parking space is assigned.
The proposed regulations reflect that
qualified transportation fringes may be
provided under a compensation reduction
arrangement which permits an employee to
make a compensation reduction election.
A compensation reduction election is an
election in which the employee chooses
between a fixed amount of compensation
to be received at a specified future date and
a fixed amount of qualified transportation
fringes to be provided with respect to a
specified future period (such as a calendar
month). The proposed regulations provide
that the compensation reduction election
for any month in a year may not exceed the
aggregate statutory monthly maximum for
that year (e.g., $240 for 1999 and 2000
($65 plus $175)). The election must be
made before the employee is able currently
to receive the taxable compensation.
Under the proposed regulations, the deter-
mination of whether the employee is able
currently to receive the taxable compensa-
tion does not depend on whether the com-
pensation has been constructively received
for purposes of section 451.
The proposed regulations require that an
election be irrevocable after the beginning
of the period for which the qualified trans-
portation fringes will be provided. How-
ever, unused amounts can be carried over to
any subsequent months, including months
in subsequent years, but cannot be used for
any purpose other than qualified transporta-
tion fringes under section 132(f).
The proposed regulations provide that
the exclusion for qualified transportation
fringes applies only to employees. Part-
ners, 2-percent S-corporation sharehold-
ers, and independent contractors are not
considered to be employees for purposes
of qualified transportation fringes. How-
ever, amounts may be excludable pur-
suant to the working condition fringe
rules and the de minimis fringe rules that
apply to partners, 2-percent S- corpora-
tion shareholders, and independent con-
tractors under section 132(d) and (e).
The proposed regulations provide that
qualified transportation fringes not ex-
ceeding the applicable statutory monthly
limit are not subject to employment taxes.
However, qualified transportation fringes
exceeding the applicable statutory
monthly limit are includible in the em-
ployee’s wages for income and employ-
ment tax purposes. If the value of non-
cash qualified transportation fringes
provided to an employee exceeds the ap-
plicable statutory monthly limit, the em-
ployer may follow the reporting and with-
holding guidelines provided in
Announcement 85–113, 1985–31 I.R.B.
31. Announcement 85–113 provides that
employers may elect, for purposes of the
FICA, the FUTA, and federal income tax
withholding, to treat noncash fringe bene-
fits as paid on a pay period, quarterly,
semi-annual, annual, or other basis, pro-
vided that the benefits are treated as paid
no less frequently than annually. An-
nouncement 85–113 also provides a spe-
cial accounting rule for noncash fringes
provided during the last two months of a
calendar year.
Special Analyses
It has been determined that this notice
of proposed rulemaking is not a signifi-
cant regulatory action as defined in Exec-
utive Order 12866. Therefore, a regula-
tory assessment is not required.
An Initial Regulatory Flexibility
Analysis has been prepared as required
for the collection of information in this
notice of proposed rulemaking under 5
U.S.C. § 603. The analysis follows:
Initial Regulatory Flexibility Analysis
This proposed rule may have an impact
on small organizations that provide quali-
fied transportation fringes in the form of
cash reimbursement or that offer qualified
transportation fringes in lieu of salary.
Section 132(f)(3) provides that qualified
transportation fringes may be provided in
the form of cash reimbursement. The leg-
islative history indicates that cash reim-
bursements must be made pursuant to a
bona fide reimbursement arrangement.
Thus, this proposed rule provides that em-
ployers must receive substantiation from
employees as a condition to providing
cash reimbursement for qualified trans-
portation fringes. Section 132(f)(4) pro-
vides that an employee may choose be-
tween cash compensation and qualified
transportation fringes. This proposed rule
provides that employers must keep
records with respect to employee com-
pensation reduction elections. Thus, the
requirements under this proposed rule
create a collection of information require-
ment for employers.
The objectives of this proposed rule
with respect to employee substantiation of
qualified transportation fringes is to carry
out the legislative intent that cash reim-
bursement be provided by an employer
only under a bona fide reimbursement
arrangement. The objective of the record-
keeping requirement with respect to em-
ployee compensation reduction elections
is to ensure against recharacterization of
taxable compensation after it has been
paid to an employee. The legal basis for
this proposed rule is section 132(f)(3) and
(4).
All classes of employers will likely
2
Other pool members may chose to reimburse the
costs of the prime member, in which event, under
Rev. Rul. 55-555, 1955-2 C.B. 20, the reimburse-
ments will not be includible in the prime member’s
gross income. See also Rev. Rul. 80-99, 1980-1
C.B. 10.

2000–7 I.R.B.627February 14, 2000
offer qualified transportation fringes and
therefore will be affected by this proposed
rule. Approximately 265,000 small enti-
ties may be affected by this proposed rule.
There are no professional skills necessary
for the recordkeeping required under this
proposed rule.
The IRS is not aware of any other rele-
vant federal rules which may duplicate,
overlap, or conflict with this proposed
rule.
A less burdensome alternative for small
organizations would be to exempt those
entities from the recordkeeping require-
ments under this proposed rule. However,
it would be inconsistent with the statutory
provisions and the legislative history to ex-
empt those entities from the recordkeeping
requirements imposed under this rule.
This proposed rule provides several op-
tions which avoid more burdensome
recordkeeping requirements for small enti-
ties. This proposed rule provides that (1)
there are no substantiation requirements if
the employer distributes transit passes in
kind; (2) a compensation reduction elec-
tion can be made electronically; (3) an
election to reduce compensation can be au-
tomatically renewed; and (4) an employer
can provide for deemed compensation re-
duction elections under its qualified trans-
portation fringe benefit plan.
Pursuant to section 7805(f) of the Inter-
nal Revenue Code, this notice of pro-
posed rulemaking will be submitted to the
Chief Counsel for Advocacy of the Small
Business Administration for comment on
its impact on small business.
Comments and Public Hearing
Before these proposed regulations are
adopted as final regulations, considera-
tion will be given to any written com-
ments (a signed original and eight (8)
copies) and electronic comments that are
submitted timely to the IRS. The IRS and
Treasury Department specifically request
comments on the clarity of the proposed
regulations and how they can be made
easier to understand, and on the adminis-
trability of the rules in the proposed regu-
lations. All comments will be available
for public inspection and copying.
A public hearing has been scheduled for
June 1, 2000, beginning at 10 a.m. in room
2615 of the Internal Revenue Building,
1111 Constitution Avenue, NW., Wash-
ington, DC. Due to building security pro-
cedures, visitors must enter at the 10
th
Street entrance, located between Constitu-
tion and Pennsylvania Avenues, NW. In
addition, all visitors must present photo
identification to enter the building. Be-
cause of access restrictions, visitors will
not be admitted beyond the immediate en-
trance area more than 15 minutes before
the hearing starts. For information about
having your name placed on the building
access list to attend the hearing, see the
“FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT” section of this preamble.
The rules of 26 CFR 601.601 (a) (3)
apply to the hearing. Persons who wish to
present oral comments at the hearing must
submit written comments and an outline
of the topics to be discussed and the time
to be devoted to each topic (signed origi-
nal and eight (8) copies) by May 10,
2000. A period of 10 minutes will be al-
lotted to each person for making com-
ments. An agenda showing the schedul-
ing of the speakers will be prepared after
the deadline for receiving outlines has
passed. Copies of the agenda will be
available free of charge at the hearing.
Drafting Information
The principal author of these proposed
regulations is John Richards, Office of the
Associate Chief Counsel (Employee Ben-
efits and Exempt Organizations). How-
ever, other personnel from the IRS and
Treasury Department participated in their
development.
* * * * *
Proposed Amendments to the
Regulations
Accordingly, 26 CFR part 1 is pro-
posed to be amended as follows:
PART 1—INCOME TAXES
Paragraph 1. The authority citation for
part 1 continues to read to read in part as
follows:
Authority: 26 U.S.C. 7805 * * *
Par. 2. Section 1.132–0 is amended by
adding entries for §1.132–9 to read as fol-
lows:
§1.132–0 Outline of regulations under
section 132.
* * * * *
§1.132–9(a) Table of Contents.
§1.132–9(b) Questions and Answers.
* * * * *
Par. 3 Section 1.132–9 is added to
read as follows:
§1.132–9 Qualified Transportation
Fringes.
(a) Table of Contents. This section
contains a list of the questions and an-
swers in §1.132–9.
Q-1. What is a qualified transportation
fringe?
Q-2. What is transportation in a com-
muter highway vehicle?
Q-3. What are transit passes?
Q-4. What is qualified parking?
Q-5. To which workers may qualified
transportation fringes be provided?
Q-6. Must a qualified transportation
fringe benefit plan be in writing?
Q-7. Is there a limit on the value of quali-
fied transportation fringes that may be ex-
cluded from an employee’s gross income?
Q-8. What amount is includible in an em-
ployee’s wages for income and employ-
ment tax purposes if the value of the qual-
ified transportation fringe exceeds the
applicable statutory monthly limit?
Q-9. Are excludable qualified transporta-
tion fringes calculated on a monthly
basis?
Q-10. May an employee receive qualified
transportation fringes from more than one
employer?
Q-11. May qualified transportation
fringes be provided to employees pur-
suant to a compensation reduction agree-
ment?
Q-12. What is a compensation reduction
election for purposes of section 132(f)?
Q–13. Is there a limit to the amount of
the compensation reduction?
Q–14. When must the employee have
made a compensation reduction election
and under what circumstances can the
amount be paid in cash to the employee?
Q–15. May an employee whose qualified
transportation fringe costs are less than
the employee’s compensation reduction
carry over this excess amount to subse-
quent periods?
Q–16. How does section 132(f) apply to
expense reimbursements?
Q-17. May an employer provide nontax-
able cash reimbursement under section
132(f) for periods longer than one month?
Q-18. What are the substantiation re-
quirements if an employer distributes
transit passes?
Q-19. May an employer choose to im-
pose substantiation requirements in addi-
tion to those described in this regulation?

February 14, 20006282000–7 I.R.B.
Q-20. How is the value of parking deter-
mined?
Q-21. How do the qualified transporta-
tion fringe rules apply to van pools?
Q-22. What are the reporting and em-
ployment tax requirements for qualified
transportation fringes?
Q-23. How does section 132(f) interact
with other fringe benefit rules?
Q-24. May qualified transportation
fringes be provided to individuals who are
partners, 2-percent shareholders of S-cor-
porations, or independent contractors?
(b) Questions and Answers.
Q-1. What is a qualified transporta-
tion fringe?
A-1. (a) The following benefits are
“qualified transportation fringe” benefits:
(1) Transportation in a commuter high-
way vehicle.
(2) Transit passes.
(3) Qualified parking.
(b) An employer may simultaneously
provide an employee with any one or
more of these three benefits.
Q-2. What is transportation in a
commuter highway vehicle?
A-2. Transportation in a commuter
highway vehicle is transportation pro-
vided by an employer to an employee in
connection with travel between the em-
ployee’s residence and place of employ-
ment. A “commuter highway vehicle” is
a highway vehicle with a seating capacity
of at least 6 adults (excluding the driver)
and with respect to which at least 80 per-
cent of the vehicle’s mileage is reasonably
expected to be–
(a) For transporting employees in con-
nection with travel between their resi-
dences and their place of employment;
and
(b) On trips during which the number
of employees transported for commuting
is at least one-half of the adult seating ca-
pacity of the vehicle (excluding the dri-
ver).
Q-3. What are transit passes?
A-3. A “transit pass” is any pass,
token, farecard, voucher, or similar item
(including an item exchangeable for fare
media) that entitles a person to transporta-
tion—
(a) On mass transit facilities (whether
or not publicly owned); or
(b) Provided by any person in the busi-
ness of transporting persons for compen-
sation or hire in a highway vehicle with a
seating capacity of at least six adults (ex-
cluding the driver).
Q-4. What is qualified parking?
A-4. (a) “Qualified parking” is
parking provided to an employee by an
employer—
(1) On or near the employer’s business
premises; or
(2) At a location from which the em-
ployee commutes to work by carpool,
commuter highway vehicle, mass transit
facilities, transportation provided by any
person in the business of transporting per-
sons for compensation or hire or by any
other means.
(b) However, parking on or near prop-
erty used by the employee for residential
purposes is not qualified parking.
(c) Parking is provided by an employer
if—
(1) The employer pays for the parking;
(2) The employer reimburses the em-
ployee for parking expenses; or
(3) The parking is on property that the
employer owns or leases. See Q/A-16 of
this section for rules relating to cash reim-
bursements.
Q-5. To which workers may quali-
fied transportation fringes be provided?
A-5. Qualified transportation
fringes may be provided only by employ-
ers to employees. The term “employee”
for purposes of qualified transportation
fringes is defined in §1.132–1(b)(2)(i).
This term includes only common law em-
ployees and other statutory employees,
such as officers of corporations. See
Q/A-24 of this section for rules regarding
partners, 2-percent shareholders, and in-
dependent contractors.
Q-6. Must a qualified transportation
fringe benefit plan be in writing?
A-6. No. Section 132(f) does not re-
quire that a qualified transportation fringe
benefit plan be in writing.
Q-7. Is there a limit on the value of
qualified transportation fringes that may
be excluded from an employee’s gross in-
come?
A-7. (a) Transportation in a com-
muter highway vehicle and transit passes.
Before January 1, 2002, up to $65 is ex-
cludable from the gross income of an em-
ployee for transportation in a commuter
highway vehicle and transit passes pro-
vided by an employer for a month. On
January 1, 2002, this amount is increased
to $100 per month.
(b) Parking. Up to $175 is exclud-
able from the gross income of an em-
ployee for qualified parking in a month.
(c) Combination. An employer may
provide qualified parking benefits in addi-
tion to transportation in a commuter high-
way vehicle and transit passes.
(d) Cost-of-living adjustments. The
amounts in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this
Q/A–7 are adjusted annually, beginning
with 2000, to reflect cost-of-living. The
adjusted figures are announced by the
Service before the beginning of the year.
Q-8. What amount is includible in
an employee’s wages for income and em-
ployment tax purposes if the value of the
qualified transportation fringe exceeds the
applicable statutory monthly limit?
A-8. Generally, an employee must
include in gross income the amount by
which the fair market value of the benefit
exceeds the sum of the amount, if any,
paid by the employee and any amount ex-
cluded from gross income under section
132(a)(5). Thus, assuming no other statu-
tory exclusion applies, if an employer
provides an employee with a qualified
transportation fringe that exceeds the ap-
plicable statutory monthly limit and the
employee does not make any payment,
the value of the benefits provided in ex-
cess of the applicable statutory monthly
limit is included in the employee’s wages
for income and employment tax purposes.
See § 1.61–21(b)(1). The following ex-
amples illustrate the principles of this
Q/A-8:
Example 1. (i) For each month in 2000, Em-
ployer M provides a transit pass valued at $75 to
Employee D, who does not pay any amount to Em-
ployer M for the transit pass.
(ii) In this example, because the value of the
monthly transit pass exceeds the statutory monthly
limit by $10, $120 ($75 - $65, times 12 months)
must be included in D’s wages for income and em-
ployment tax purposes for 2000 with respect to the
transit passes.
Example 2. (i) For each month in 2000, Em-
ployer M provides qualified parking valued at $195
to Employee E, who does not pay any amount to M
for the parking.
(ii) In this example, because the fair market value
of the qualified parking exceeds the statutory
monthly limit by $20, $240 ($195 - $175, times 12
months) must be included in Employee E’s wages
for income and employment tax purposes for 2000
with respect to the qualified parking.
Example 3. (i) For each month in 2000, Em-
ployer P provides qualified parking with a fair mar-
ket value of $220 per month to its employees, but
charges each employee $45 per month.
(ii) In this example, because the sum of the
amount paid by an employee ($45) plus the amount

2000–7 I.R.B.629February 14, 2000
excludable for qualified parking ($175) is not less
than the fair market value of the monthly benefit, no
amount is includible in the employee’s wages for in-
come and employment tax purposes with respect to
the qualified parking.
Q-9. Are excludable qualified trans-
portation fringes calculated on a monthly
basis?
A-9. Yes. The value of transporta-
tion in a commuter highway vehicle, tran-
sit passes, and qualified parking is calcu-
lated on a monthly basis to determine
whether the value of the benefit has ex-
ceeded the applicable statutory monthly
limit on qualified transportation fringes.
Except in the case of a transit pass, the ap-
plicable statutory monthly limit applies to
qualified transportation fringes used by
the employee in a month. In the case of a
transit pass, the applicable statutory
monthly limit applies to the transit passes
provided by the employer to the employee
in a month for that month or for any pre-
vious month in the calendar year.
Monthly exclusion amounts are not com-
bined to provide a qualified transportation
fringe in any month exceeding the statu-
tory limit. A “month” is a calendar month
or a substantially equivalent period ap-
plied consistently. The following exam-
ples illustrate the principles of this Q/A-9:
Example 1.(i) Employee E incurs $150 for qual-
ified parking used during the month of June, 2000,
for which E is reimbursed $150 by Employer R. E
incurs $180 in expenses for qualified parking used
during the month of July, 2000, for which E is reim-
bursed $180 by R.
(ii) In this example, because monthly exclusion
amounts may not be combined to provide a benefit
in any month greater than the applicable statutory
limit, the amount by which the amount reimbursed
for July exceeds the applicable statutory monthly
limit ($180 minus $175 equals $5) is includible in
E’s wages for income and employment tax purposes.
Example 2. (i). Employee F receives transit
passes from Employer G with a value of $195 in the
month of March (when the applicable statutory
monthly limit is $65). F was hired during January
and has not received any transit passes from G.
(ii). In this example, the value of the transit
passes (three months times $65 equals $195) is ex-
cludable from F’s wages for income and employ-
ment tax purposes. However, if F was not hired
until March, only $65 would be excludable from F’s
wages for income and employment tax purposes.
Example 3. (i). Each month during 2000, Em-
ployer R distributes transit passes with a face
amount of $70 to each of its employees. Transit
passes with a face amount of $70 can be purchased
from the transit system by any individual for $65.
(ii). In this example, because the value of the
transit passes distributed by R does not exceed the
applicable statutory monthly limit ($65), no portion
of the transit passes is included as wages for income
and employment tax purposes.
Q-10. May an employee receive
qualified transportation fringes from more
than one employer?
A-10. Yes. The statutory monthly
limits described in Q/A-7 of this section
apply to benefits provided by an employer
to its employees. For this purpose, all
employees treated as employed by a sin-
gle employer under section 414(b), (c),
(m), or (o) are treated as employed by a
single employer. See § 1.132–1(c). Thus,
qualified transportation fringes paid by
entities under common control under sec-
tion 414(b), (c), (m), or (o) are combined
for purposes of applying the applicable
statutory limit. In addition, an individual
who is treated as an employee of the em-
ployer under section 414(n) is treated as
an employee of the employer for purposes
of section 132. See § 414(t). The follow-
ing examples illustrate the principles of
this Q/A-10:
Example 1. (i) During 2000, Employee E works
for Employers M and N, who are unrelated and not
treated as a single employer under section 414(b),
(c), (m), or (o). Each month, M and N each provide
qualified parking benefits to E with a value of $100.
(ii) In this example, because M and N are unre-
lated employers, and the value of the monthly park-
ing benefit provided by each is not more than the ap-
plicable statutory monthly limit, the parking benefits
provided by each employer are excludable as quali-
fied transportation fringes assuming that the other
requirements of this section are satisfied.
Example 2. (i) Same facts as in Example 1, ex-
cept that M and N are treated as a single employer
under section 414(b).
(ii) In this example, because M and N are treated
as a single employer, the value of the monthly park-
ing benefit provided by M and N must be combined
for purposes of determining whether the applicable
statutory monthly limit has been exceeded. Thus,
the amount by which the value of the parking benefit
exceeds the monthly limit ($200 minus $175 equals
$25) for each month in 2000 is includible in E’s
wages for income and employment tax purposes.
Q-11. May qualified transportation
fringes be provided to employees pur-
suant to a compensation reduction agree-
ment?
A-11. Yes. An employer may offer
employees a choice between cash com-
pensation and any qualified transportation
fringe. An employee who is offered this
choice and who elects qualified trans-
portation fringes is not required to include
the cash compensation in income if—
(a) The election is pursuant to an
arrangement described in Q/A-12 of this
section; (b) The amount of the reduction
in cash compensation does not exceed the
limitation in Q/A-13 of this section;
(c) The arrangement satisfies the tim-
ing and reimbursement rules in Q/A-14
and 16 of this section; and
(d) The related fringe benefit arrange-
ment otherwise satisfies the requirements
set forth elsewhere in this section.
Q-12. What is a compensation re-
duction election for purposes of section
132(f)?
A-12. (a) Election requirements
generally.A compensation reduction
arrangement is an arrangement under
which the employer provides the em-
ployee with the right to elect whether the
employee will receive either a fixed
amount of cash compensation at a speci-
fied future date or a fixed amount of qual-
ified transportation fringes to be provided
for a specified future period (such as qual-
ified parking to be used during a future
calendar month). The employee’s elec-
tion must be in writing or another form,
such as electronic, that includes, in a per-
manent and verifiable form, the informa-
tion required to be in the election. The
election must contain the date of the elec-
tion, the amount of the compensation to
be reduced, and the period for which the
benefit will be provided. The election
must relate to a fixed dollar amount or
fixed percentage of compensation reduc-
tion. An election to reduce compensation
for a period by a set amount for such pe-
riod may be automatically renewed for
subsequent periods.
(b) Negative election permitted. An
employer may provide under its qualified
transportation fringe benefit plan that a
compensation reduction election will be
deemed to have been made if the em-
ployee does not elect to receive cash com-
pensation in lieu of the qualified trans-
portation fringe provided that the
employee receives adequate notice that a
compensation reduction will be made and
is given adequate opportunity to choose to
receive the cash compensation instead of
the qualified transportation fringe.
Q–13. Is there a limit to the amount
of the compensation reduction?
A–13. Yes. Each month, the amount
of the compensation reduction may not
exceed the combined applicable statutory
monthly limits for transportation in a
commuter highway vehicle, transit
passes, and qualified parking. For exam-
ple, for 2000, an employee could elect to
reduce compensation for any month by no

February 14, 20006302000–7 I.R.B.
more than $240 ($65 for transportation in
a commuter highway vehicle and transit
passes, plus $175 for qualified parking)
with respect to qualified transportation
fringes. If an employee were to elect to
reduce compensation by $250 for a
month, the excess $10 ($250 minus $240)
would be includible in the employee’s
wages for income and employment tax
purposes.
Q–14. When must the employee
have made a compensation reduction
election and under what circumstances
can the amount be paid in cash to the em-
ployee?
A–14. The compensation reduction
election must satisfy the following re-
quirements.
(a) Timing of election. The compen-
sation reduction election must be made
before the employee is able currently to
receive the cash or other taxable amount
at the employee’s discretion. The deter-
mination of whether the employee is able
currently to receive the cash does not de-
pend on whether it has been construc-
tively received for purposes of section
451. The election must specify that the
period (such as a calendar month) for
which the qualified transportation fringe
will be provided must not begin before
the election is made. For this purpose, the
date a qualified transportation fringe is
provided is—
(1) The date the employee receives a
voucher or similar item; or
(2) In any other case, the date the em-
ployee uses the qualified transportation
fringe.
(b) Thus, a compensation reduction
election must relate to qualified trans-
portation fringes to be provided after the
election.
(c) Revocability of elections. The
employee may not revoke a compensation
reduction election after the employee is
able currently to receive the cash or other
taxable amount at the employee’s discre-
tion. In addition, the election may not be
revoked after the beginning of the period
for which the qualified transportation
fringe will be provided.
(d) Compensation reduction
amounts not refundable. Unless an elec-
tion is revoked in a manner consistent
with paragraph (c) of this Q/A-14, an em-
ployee may not subsequently receive the
compensation (in cash or any form other
than by payment of a qualified transporta-
tion fringe under the employer’s plan).
Thus, an employer’s qualified transporta-
tion fringe benefit plan may not provide
that an employee who ceases to partici-
pate in the employer’s qualified trans-
portation fringe benefit plan is entitled to
receive a refund of the amounts by which
the employee’s compensation reduction
exceeds the actual qualified transportation
fringes provided to the employee by the
employer.
(e) Examples.The following examples
illustrate the principles of this Q/A-14:
Example 1. (i) Employer P maintains a qualified
transportation fringe benefit arrangement. Employ-
ees of P are paid twice per month, with the payroll
dates being the first and the fifteenth day of the
month. Under P’s arrangement, an employee is per-
mitted to elect at any time before the first day of a
month to reduce his or her compensation payable
during that month in an amount up to the applicable
statutory monthly limit (i.e., for 2000, $65 if the em-
ployee elects coverage for transportation in a com-
muter highway vehicle or a mass transit pass, or
$175 if the employee chooses qualified parking) in
return for the right to receive qualified transporta-
tion fringes up to the amount of the election. If such
an election is made, P will provide a mass transit
pass for that month with a value not exceeding the
compensation reduction amount elected by the em-
ployee or will reimburse the cost of other qualified
transportation fringes used by the employee on or
after the first day of that month up to the compensa-
tion reduction amount elected by the employee. Any
compensation reduction amount elected by the em-
ployee for the month that is not used for qualified
transportation fringes is not refunded to the em-
ployee at any future date.
(ii) In this example, the arrangement satisfies
the requirements of this Q/A-14 because the election
is made before the employee is able currently to re-
ceive the cash and the election specifies the future
period for which the qualified transportation fringes
will be provided. The arrangement would also sat-
isfy the requirements of this Q/A-14 and Q/A-13 of
this section if employees were allowed to elect to re-
duce compensation up to $240 (for 2000) per month.
(iii) The arrangement would also satisfy the re-
quirements of this Q/A-14 (and Q/A-13 of this sec-
tion) if employees were allowed to make an election
at any time before the first or the fifteenth day of the
month to reduce their compensation payable on that
payroll date by an amount not in excess of one-half
of the applicable statutory monthly limit (depending
on the type of qualified transportation fringe elected
by the employee) and P provides a mass transit pass
on or after the applicable payroll date for the com-
pensation reduction amount elected by the employee
for the payroll date or reimburses the cost of other
qualified transportation fringes used by the em-
ployee on or after the payroll date up to the compen-
sation reduction amount elected by the employee for
that payroll date.
Example 2. (i) Employee Q elects to reduce his
compensation payable on March 1 of a year (when
the statutory monthly limit for transportation in a
commuter highway vehicle and transit passes is $65)
by $195 in exchange for a mass transit voucher to be
provided in March. The election is made on the pre-
ceding February 27. Employee Q was hired in Janu-
ary of the year. On March 10 of the year, the em-
ployer of Employee Q delivers to Employee Q a
mass transit voucher worth $195.
(ii) In this example, $130 is included in Em-
ployee Q’s wages for income and employment tax
purposes because the compensation reduction elec-
tion fails to satisfy the requirement in this Q/A-14
and Q/A-12 of this section that the election relate to
qualified transportation fringes to be provided for a
future period to the extent the election relates to $65
worth of transit passes for each of January and Feb-
ruary of the year. No amount would be included in
Employee Q’s wages as a result of the election if
$195 worth of mass transit passes were instead de-
livered to Employee Q in May of the year (because
the compensation reduction would relate solely to
fringes to be provided for a future period and the
amount provided does not exceed the aggregate
limit for the period, i.e., the sum of $65 for each of
March, April, and May)
Q–15. May an employee whose
qualified transportation fringe costs are
less than the employee’s compensation re-
duction carry over this excess amount to
subsequent periods?
A–15. Yes. An employee may carry
over unused compensation reduction
amounts to subsequent periods under the
plan of the employee’s employer. The
following example illustrates the princi-
ples of this Q/A-15:
Example. (i) By an election made before No-
vember 1, 1999, Employee E elects to reduce com-
pensation in the amount of $65 for the month of No-
vember, 1999. E incurs $50 in employee-operated
commuter highway vehicle expenses during No-
vember for which E is reimbursed $50 by Employer
R. By an election made before December 1, 1999, E
elects to reduce compensation by $65 for the month
of December. E incurs $65 in employee-operated
commuter highway vehicle expenses during Decem-
ber for which E is reimbursed $65 by R. Before Jan-
uary 1, 2000, E elects to reduce compensation by
$50 for the month of January. E incurs $65 in em-
ployee-operated commuter highway vehicle ex-
penses during January for which E is reimbursed
$65 by R because R allows E to carry over to Janu-
ary, 2000, the $15 amount by which the compensa-
tion reductions for November and December ex-
ceeded the employee-operated commuter highway
vehicle expenses incurred during those months.
(ii) In this example, because E is reimbursed in
an amount not exceeding the applicable statutory
monthly limit, and the reimbursement does not ex-
ceed the amount of employee-operated commuter
highway vehicle expenses incurred during the
month of January, the amount reimbursed ($65) is
excludable from E’s wages for income and employ-
ment tax purposes.
Q–16. How does section 132(f)
apply to expense reimbursements?
A-16. (a) In general. The term
“qualified transportation fringe” includes

2000–7 I.R.B.631February 14, 2000
cash reimbursement by an employer to an
employee for expenses incurred or paid
by an employee for transportation in a
commuter highway vehicle or qualified
parking. The reimbursement must be
made under a bona fide reimbursement
arrangement which meets the rules of
paragraph (d) of this Q/A-16. The term
“cash reimbursement” does not include
cash advances.
(b) Special rule for transit passes.
The term “qualified transportation fringe”
includes cash reimbursement for transit
passes made under a bona fide reimburse-
ment arrangement, but, in accordance
with section 132(f)(3), only if no voucher
or similar item that may be exchanged
only for a transit pass is readily available
for direct distribution by the employer to
employees. For this purpose, a voucher
or similar item is “readily available” if an
employer can obtain it—
(1) On terms no less favorable than
those available to an individual employee;
and
(2) Without incurring a significant ad-
ministrative cost.
(c) Significant administrative cost.
Administrative costs relate only to fees
paid to fare media providers. The deter-
mination of whether obtaining a voucher
would result in a significant administra-
tive cost is made with respect to each
transit system voucher. A transit system
voucher is a voucher that is accepted by
one or more mass transit operators (e.g.,
train, subway, and bus) in an area as fare
media (or in exchange for fare media).
Administrative costs are treated as signifi-
cant if the average monthly administrative
costs incurred by the employer for a
voucher (disregarding delivery charges
imposed by the fare media provider to the
extent not in excess of $15 per order) are
more than 1 percent of the average
monthly value of the vouchers for a sys-
tem. Thus, whether a voucher is readily
available without incurring a significant
administrative cost is determined with re-
spect to the transit system in each area for
which the voucher may be used. The fol-
lowing example illustrates the principles
of this Q/A-16:
Example. (i) Company C in City X sells mass
transit vouchers to employers in the metropolitan
area of X worth $65 each. Several different bus,
rail, van pool, and ferry operators service X, and a
number of the operators accept the vouchers either
as fare media or in exchange for fare media. Em-
ployers can readily obtain vouchers for distribution
to their employees. To cover its operating expenses,
C imposes on each voucher a 50 cents charge, plus a
$15 charge for delivery. Employer M disburses
vouchers purchased from C to its employees who
use operators that accept the vouchers.
(ii) In this example, because the cost of a voucher
disbursed to M’s employees is not more than 1 per-
cent of the value of the voucher (50 cents divided by
$65 equals 0.77 percent) and the delivery charges
are disregarded because they are not more than $15,
vouchers for X are readily available. Thus, the
vouchers disbursed to M’s employees are qualified
transportation fringes and any reimbursement of
mass transportation costs in X would not be a quali-
fied transportation fringe.
(d) Substantiation requirements.
Employers that make cash reimburse-
ments must establish a bona fide reim-
bursement arrangement to establish that
their employees have, in fact, incurred ex-
penses for transportation in a commuter
highway vehicle, transit passes, or quali-
fied parking. For purposes of section
132(f), what constitutes a bona fide reim-
bursement arrangement may vary depend-
ing on the facts and circumstances, in-
cluding the method or methods of
payment utilized within the mass transit
system. The employer must implement
reasonable procedures to ensure that an
amount equal to the reimbursement was
incurred for transportation in a commuter
highway vehicle, transit passes, or quali-
fied parking. The following are examples
of reasonable reimbursement procedures
for purposes of this Q/A-16:
(1) An employee presents to the em-
ployer a parking expense receipt for park-
ing on or near the employer’s business
premises and certifies that the parking
was used by the employee and the em-
ployer has no reason to doubt the em-
ployee’s certification.
(2) An employee submits a used
transit pass to the employer at the end of
the month and certifies both that he or she
purchased it, and that he or she used it
during the month, or presents a transit
pass to the employer at the beginning of
the month and certifies that it will be used
it during the month. In both cases, the
employer has no reason to doubt the em-
ployee’s certification.
(3) If a receipt is not provided in the
ordinary course of business (e.g., if the em-
ployee uses metered parking or if used
transit passes cannot be returned to the
user), the employee certifies to the em-
ployer the type and the amount of expenses
incurred and the employer has no reason to
doubt the employee’s certification.
Q-17. May an employer provide
nontaxable cash reimbursement under
section 132(f) for periods longer than one
month?
A-17. Yes. Qualified transportation
fringes include reimbursement to employ-
ees for costs incurred for transportation in
more than one month, provided the reim-
bursement for each month is calculated
separately and does not exceed the applic-
able statutory monthly limit for any
month. See Q/A-8 and 9 of this section if
the limit for a month is exceeded. The
following example illustrates the princi-
ples of this Q/A-17:
Example. (i) Employee R pays $100 per month
for qualified parking used during the period from
April 1, 2000 through June 30, 2000. After receiv-
ing adequate substantiation from R, R’s employer
reimburses R $300 in cash on June 30, 2000.
(ii) In this example, because the value of the re-
imbursed expenses for each month did not exceed
the applicable statutory monthly limit, the $300 re-
imbursement is excludable from R’s wages for in-
come and employment tax purposes as a qualified
transportation fringe.
Q-18. What are the substantiation
requirements if an employer distributes
transit passes?
A-18. There are no substantiation
requirements if the employer distributes
transit passes. Thus, an employer may
distribute a transit pass for each month
with a value not more than the statutory
monthly limit without requiring any certi-
fication from the employee regarding the
use of the transit pass.
Q-19. May an employer choose to
impose substantiation requirements in ad-
dition to those described in this regula-
tion?
A-19. Yes.
Q-20. How is the value of parking
determined?
A-20. Section 1.61–21(b)(2) applies
for purposes of determining the value of
parking.
Q-21. How do the qualified trans-
portation fringe rules apply to van pools?
A-21. (a) Van pools generally. Em-
ployer- and employee-operated van pools,
as well as private or public transit-oper-
ated van pools, may qualify as qualified
transportation fringes. The value of van
pool benefits which are qualified trans-
portation fringes may be excluded up to
the applicable statutory monthly limit for
transportation in a commuter highway ve-
hicle and transit passes, less the value of

February 14, 20006322000–7 I.R.B.
any transit passes provided by the em-
ployer for the month.
(b) Employer-operated van pools.
The value of van pool transportation pro-
vided by or for an employer to its employ-
ees is excludable as a qualified transporta-
tion fringe, provided the van qualifies as a
“commuter highway vehicle” as defined in
section 132(f)(5)(B) and Q/A–2 of this
section. A van pool is operated by or for
the employer if the employer purchases or
leases vans to enable employees to com-
mute together or the employer contracts
with and pays a third party to provide the
vans and some or all of the costs of operat-
ing the vans, including maintenance, liabil-
ity insurance and other operating expenses.
(c) Employee-operated van pools.
Cash reimbursement by an employer to
employees for expenses incurred for
transportation in a van pool operated by
employees independent of their employer
are excludable as qualified transportation
fringes provided that the van qualifies as a
“commuter highway vehicle” as defined
in section 132(f)(5)(B) and Q/A-2 of this
section. See Q/A-16 of this section for
the rules governing cash reimbursements.
(d) Private or public transit-oper-
ated van pool transit passes. The quali-
fied transportation fringe exclusion for
transit passes is available for travel in van
pools owned and operated either by pub-
lic transit authorities or by any person in
the business of transporting persons for
compensation or hire. In accordance with
paragraph (b) of Q/A-3 of this section, the
van must seat at least six adults (exclud-
ing the driver). See Q/A-16(b) and (c) of
this section for a special rule for cash re-
imbursement for transit passes.
(e) Value of van pool transportation
benefits. Section 1.61–21(b)(2) provides
that the fair market value of a fringe benefit
is based on all the facts and circumstances.
Alternatively, transportation in an em-
ployer-provided commuter highway vehi-
cle may be valued under the automobile
lease valuation rule in § 1.61–21(d), the ve-
hicle cents-per-mile rule in § 1.61–21(e), or
the commuting valuation rule in §
1.61–21(f). If one of these special valua-
tion rules is used, the employer must use
the same valuation rule to value the use of
the commuter highway vehicle by each em-
ployee who share the use. See §
1.61–21(c).
(f) Qualified parking prime member.
If an employee obtains a qualified parking
space as a result of membership in a car or
van pool, the applicable statutory monthly
limit for qualified parking applies to the
individual to whom the parking space is
assigned. This individual is the “prime
member.” In determining the tax conse-
quences to the prime member, the statu-
tory monthly limit amounts of each car
pool member may not be combined. If
the employer provides access to the space
and the space is not assigned to a particu-
lar individual, then the employer must
designate one of its employees as the
prime member who will bear the tax con-
sequences. The employer may not desig-
nate more than one prime member for a
car or van pool during a month. The em-
ployer of the prime member is responsible
for including the value of the qualified
parking in excess of the statutory monthly
limit in the prime member’s wages for in-
come and employment tax purposes.
Q-22. What are the reporting and
employment tax requirements for quali-
fied transportation fringes?
A-22. (a) Employment tax treatment
generally. Qualified transportation
fringes not exceeding the applicable statu-
tory monthly limit described in Q/A-7 of
this section are not wages for purposes of
the Federal Insurance Contributions Act
(FICA), the Federal Unemployment Tax
Act (FUTA), and federal income tax with-
holding. Any amount by which an em-
ployee elects to reduce compensation as
provided in Q/A-11 of this section is not
subject to the FICA, the FUTA, and fed-
eral income tax withholding. Qualified
transportation fringes exceeding the ap-
plicable statutory monthly limit described
in Q/A-7 of this section are wages for pur-
poses of the FICA, the FUTA, and federal
income tax withholding and are reported
on the employee’s Form W-2, Wage and
Tax Statement.
(b) Employment tax treatment of
cash reimbursement exceeding monthly
limits. Cash reimbursement to employees
(for example, cash reimbursement for
qualified parking) in excess of the applic-
able statutory monthly limit under section
132(f) are treated as paid for employment
tax purposes when actually or construc-
tively paid. See §§ 31.3121(a)–2(a),
31.3301–4, 31.3402(a)–1(b) of this chap-
ter. Employers must report and deposit
the amounts withheld in addition to re-
porting and depositing other employment
taxes. See Q/A-16 of this section for
rules governing cash reimbursements.
(c) Noncash fringe benefits exceed-
ing monthly limits. If the value of non-
cash qualified transportation fringes ex-
ceeds the applicable statutory monthly
limit, the employer may elect, for pur-
poses of the FICA, the FUTA, and federal
income tax withholding, to treat the non-
cash taxable fringe benefits as paid on a
pay period, quarterly, semi-annual, an-
nual, or other basis, provided that the
benefits are treated as paid no less fre-
quently than annually.
Q–23. How does section 132(f) in-
teract with other fringe benefit rules?
A-23. For purposes of section 132,
the terms “working condition fringe” and
“de minimis fringe” do not include any
qualified transportation fringe under sec-
tion 132(f). If, however, an employer pro-
vides local transportation other than transit
passes, the value of the benefit may be ex-
cludable, either totally or partially, under
fringe benefit rules other than the qualified
transportation fringe rules under section
132(f). See §§ 1.132–6(d)(2)(i) (occa-
sional local transportation fare),
1.132–6(d)(2)(iii) (transportation provided
under unusual circumstances), and
1.61–21(k) (valuation of local transporta-
tion provided to qualified employees).
Q-24. May qualified transportation
fringes be provided to individuals who
are partners, 2-percent shareholders of S-
corporations, or independent contractors?
A-24. (a) General rule. Section
132(f)(5)(E) states that self-employed in-
dividuals who are employees within the
meaning of section 401(c)(1) are not em-
ployees for purposes of section 132(f).
Therefore, individuals who are partners,
sole proprietors, or other independent
contractors are not employees for pur-
poses of section 132(f). In addition,
under section 1372(a), 2-percent share-
holders of S corporations are treated as
partners for fringe benefit purposes.
Thus, an individual who is both a 2-per-
cent shareholder of an S corporation and
a common law employee of that S corpo-
ration is not considered an employee for
purposes of section 132(f). However,
while section 132(f) does not apply to in-
dividuals who are partners, 2-percent
shareholders of S corporations, or inde-
pendent contractors, other exclusions for

2000–7 I.R.B.633February 14, 2000
working condition and de minimis
fringes may be available as described in
paragraphs (b) and (c) of this Q/A-24.
See §§ 1.132–1(b)(2) and 1.132–1(b)(4).
(b) Transit passes. The working
condition and de minimis fringe exclu-
sions under section 132(a)(3) and (4) are
available for transit passes provided to in-
dividuals who are partners, 2-percent
shareholders, and independent contrac-
tors. For example, tokens or farecards
provided by a partnership to an individual
who is a partner that enable the partner to
commute on a public transit system (not
including privately-operated van pools)
are excludable from the partner’s gross
income if the value of the tokens and fare-
cards in any month does not exceed the
dollar amount specified in §
1.132–6(d)(1). However, if the value of a
pass provided in a month exceeds the dol-
lar amount specified in § 1.132–6(d)(1),
the full value of the benefit provided (not
merely the amount in excess of the dollar
amount specified in § 1.132–6(d)(1)) is
includible in gross income.
(c) Parking. The working condition
fringe rules under section 132(d) do not
apply to commuter parking. See §
1.132–5(a)(1). However, the de minimis
fringe rules under section 132(e) are
available for parking provided to individ-
uals who are partners, 2-percent share-
holders, or independent contractors that
qualifies under the de minimis rules. See
§ 1.132–6(a) and (b). The following ex-
ample illustrates the principles of this
Q/A-24:
Example.(i) Individual G is a partner in partner-
ship P. Individual G commutes to and from G’s of-
fice every day and parks free of charge in P’s lot.
(ii) In this example, the value of the parking is
not excluded under section 132(f), but may be ex-
cluded under section 132(e) if the parking is a de
minimis fringe under § 1.132–6.
Robert E. Wenzel,
Deputy Commissioner
of Internal Revenue.
(Filed by the Office of the Federal Register on Janu-
ary 24, 2000, 1:36 p.m., and published in the issue of
the Federal Register for January 27, 2000, 65 F.R.
4388)
Notice of Proposed Rulemaking
and Notice of Public Hearing
Applying Section 197 to
Partnerships
REG–100163–00
AGENCY: Internal Revenue Service
(IRS), Treasury.
ACTION: Notice of proposed rulemaking
and notice of public hearing.
SUMMARY: This document contains
proposed regulations relating to the amor-
tization of certain intangible property to
partnership transactions involving sec-
tions 732(b) and 734(b). The proposed
regulations interpret the provisions of sec-
tion 197(f)(9), reflecting changes to the
law made by the Omnibus Budget Recon-
ciliation Act of 1993 (OBRA ’93) and af-
fect taxpayers who acquired intangible
property after August 10, 1993, or made a
retroactive election to apply OBRA ’93 to
intangibles acquired after July 25, 1991.
This document also provides a notice of
public hearing on these proposed regula-
tions.
DATES: Written comments must be re-
ceived by April 24, 2000. Outlines of top-
ics to be discussed at the public hearing
scheduled for May 24, 2000, at 10 a.m.
must be received by May 3, 2000.
ADDRESSES: Send submissions to:
CC:DOM:CORP:R (REG–100163–00),
room 5226, Internal Revenue Service, POB
7604, Ben Franklin Station, Washington,
DC 20044. Submissions may be hand de-
livered Monday through Friday between
the hours of 8 a.m. and 5 p.m. to:
CC:DOM:CORP:R (REG–100163–00),
Courier’s desk, Internal Revenue Service,
1111 Constitution Avenue, NW, Washing-
ton, DC. Alternatively, taxpayers may sub-
mit comments electronically via the Inter-
net by selecting the “Tax Regs” option on
the IRS Home Page, or by submitting com-
ments directly to the IRS Internet site at
http://www.irs.ustreas.gov/prod/tax_regs/re
gslist.html. The public hearing will be held
in Room 2615, Internal Revenue Building,
1111 Constitution Avenue, NW., Washing-
ton, DC.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CON-
TACT: Concerning the proposed regula-
tions, Robert G. Honigman, (202) 622-
3050; concerning submissions of
comments, the hearing, and/or to be
placed on the building access list to attend
the hearing Guy Traynor, (202) 622-7180
(not toll-free numbers).
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:
This document proposes to amend sec-
tion 197 of the Income Tax Regulations
(26 CFR Part 1) to provide additional
rules regarding the application of section
197(f)(9) to partnership transactions
under sections 732(b) and 734(b).
Background
On January 16, 1997, the IRS published
proposed regulations REG–209709–94,
1997–1 C.B. 731, in the Federal Register
(62 F.R. 2336) inviting comments under
sections 167(f) and 197, including the anti-
churning rules in section 197(f)(9). Com-
mentators requested that the final regula-
tions provide additional guidance on how
the special anti-churning rule of section
197(f)(9)(E) applies to increases in the
basis of partnership property under sections
732, 734, and 743. In accordance with
these comments, these proposed regula-
tions provide rules for determining the
amount of a basis adjustment under sec-
tions 732(b) and 734(b) that will be subject
to the anti-churning rules. Final regulations
being issued in T.D. 8865 at the same time
as these proposed regulations provide rules
for determining the amount of a basis ad-
justment under sections 732(d) and 743(b)
that will be subject to the anti-churning
rules.
Explanation of Provisions
A. In General
Section 197(f)(9)(E) provides that, in
applying the anti-churning rules for basis
adjustments under sections 732, 734, and
743, determinations are made at the part-
ner level, and each partner is treated as
having owned and used such partner’s
proportionate share of the partnership’s
assets. With respect to basis adjustments
under sections 732(b) and 734(b), this
rule requires taxpayers and the IRS to an-
alyze transactions that actually involve a
distribution of property from the partner-
ship to a partner as deemed transactions
involving transfers of property directly
among the partners.
B. Two-Step Analysis
The proposed regulations embody a
two-step analysis in determining whether
the anti-churning rules apply to the
deemed transfer of intangibles in transac-

February 14, 20006342000–7 I.R.B.
tions giving rise to basis adjustments
under sections 732(b) and 734(b). First, it
is necessary to determine whether the por-
tion of an intangible that a partner is
deemed to transfer is treated, immediately
prior to the deemed transfer, as being sub-
ject to the anti-churning rules for pur-
poses of applying these provisions. Sec-
ond, if the partner’s share of the
intangible is treated, immediately prior to
the deemed transfer, as being subject to
the anti-churning rules for purposes of ap-
plying these provisions, it is necessary to
determine whether the deemed transferor
and transferee are related so that the anti-
churning rules will continue to apply to
the intangible after the deemed transfer.
For purposes of applying the first prong
of the analysis, when a partner acquires
an interest in a partnership, the proposed
regulations treat the partner as acquiring
an undivided interest in all section
197(f)(9) intangibles held by a partner-
ship at the time that the partner acquires
an interest in the partnership. If a partner
acquires an interest in a partnership from
an unrelated person after August 10, 1993
(or, in certain cases, after July 25, 1991),
the partner’s share of any intangible held
by the partnership as of August 10, 1993
(or, in certain cases, after July 25, 1991) is
treated as no longer subject to the anti-
churning rules for purposes of analyzing
subsequent deemed transfers of intangi-
bles in transactions that give rise to the
basis adjustments under sections 732(b)
and 734(b). With respect to intangibles
acquired by the partnership after August
10, 1993, that are subject to the anti-
churning rules in the hands of the partner-
ship, a partner’s share of the intangible is
treated as not subject to the anti-churning
rules for purposes of analyzing these basis
adjustments if the partner acquired the in-
terest in the partnership from an unrelated
person after the partnership acquired the
tainted intangible. Once a partner’s share
of an intangible is treated as no longer
subject to the anti-churning rules for pur-
poses of analyzing subsequent deemed
transfers, that share of the intangible will
remain untainted even if the partner trans-
fers the interest to the original transferor
or a person who is related to the original
transferor, so long as the transfers are not
part of the same transaction or series of
related transactions. Special rules are
provided where a partner acquires a part-
nership interest in exchange for property
contributed to a partnership.
For purposes of applying the anti-churn-
ing rules to basis adjustments under section
732(b), the distributee partner is deemed to
acquire the distributed intangible directly
from the continuing partners of the distrib-
uting partnership. The proposed regula-
tions contain a favorable stacking rule that
treats the distributee partner as acquiring
the intangible first from the continuing
partners for whom transfers would not be
subject to the anti-churning rules (either be-
cause the continuing partner’s share of the
intangible is treated, for purposes of this
rule, as not being subject to the anti-churn-
ing rules or the distributee partner is not re-
lated to the continuing partner) to the extent
of such partners’ share of appreciation in
the intangible.
The proposed regulations contain a
special rule to ensure that, in analyzing
subsequent transfers, a partner cannot
treat the entire intangible as no longer
subject to the anti-churning rules simply
because the full basis of the intangible
(which may be significantly less than the
intangible’s fair market value) becomes
amortizable as a result of the favorable
stacking rule that applies to section
732(b) basis adjustments.
For purposes of applying the anti-churn-
ing rules to basis adjustments under section
734(b), the continuing partners are deemed
to acquire interests in the intangible that re-
mains in the partnership from the partner
who received a distribution (giving rise to
the section 734(b) basis adjustment) of
property other than the intangible. To the
extent that the distributee partner could
transfer the intangible directly to a continu-
ing partner (who may be the distributee
partner) and the transfer would not be sub-
ject to the anti-churning rules (either be-
cause the distributee partner’s share of the
intangible is treated (for purposes of this
rule) as not being subject to the anti-churn-
ing rules or the continuing partner is not re-
lated to the distributee (except in certain
circumstances)), the basis adjustment will
be amortizable with respect to the continu-
ing partner.
The proposed regulations contain a
special rule which provides that if a distri-
bution that gives rise to an increase in the
basis under section 734(b) of a section
197(f)(9) intangible held by the partner-
ship is undertaken as part of a series of re-
lated transactions that include a contribu-
tion of the intangible to the partnership by
a continuing partner, the continuing part-
ner is treated as related to the distributee
partner to the extent that the continuing
partner’s partnership interest was re-
ceived in exchange for the intangible.
In addition to issues relating to deter-
mining the amount of a basis adjustment
that is subject to the anti-churning rules,
the Treasury Department and the IRS also
recognize that certain problems may arise
in maintaining capital accounts where a
portion of a section 734(b) adjustment is
allocated to an intangible that is subject to
the anti-churning rules with respect to one
or more partners. In some situations, the
failure to allocate deductions for amortiza-
tion to any partner whose allocable share
of a section 734(b) adjustment is subject to
the anti-churning rules will distort the
partners’ economic agreement. For exam-
ple, where partners agree to share depreci-
ation and amortization deductions equally,
if one partner’s share of a section 734(b)
adjustment allocable to an intangible asset
is subject to the anti-churning rules, the
capital accounts of the partners will not re-
flect an equivalent sharing of the eco-
nomic amortization from the asset absent
special adjustments to account for the dis-
parity between the allocation of tax amor-
tization and the intended allocation of eco-
nomic amortization. Furthermore,
divergence of book and tax accounts with
respect to an intangible that may result
from such special adjustments can cause
problems in allocating the correct amount
of taxable gain or loss to the appropriate
parties upon disposition of the intangible.
Similar problems may arise as a result of
allowing remedial allocations for intangi-
bles that otherwise are subject to the anti-
churning rules and are addressed in
§1.197–2(h)(12)(vii)(B). These regula-
tions are not intended to create such dis-
tortions. Nevertheless, a general rule that
resolves these distortions in all situations
(including different allocations of gain and
depreciation or amortization) would be
extremely complicated and, perhaps, un-
duly narrow. Therefore, the proposed reg-
ulations provide that taxpayers may use
any reasonable method to determine
amortization for book purposes in these
situations, provided that the method used
does not contravene the purposes of the
anti-churning rules under section 197 (i.e.,

2000–7 I.R.B.635February 14, 2000
the effect of the book adjustments will not
be such that a partner who is subject to the
anti-churning rules will receive, directly
or indirectly, deductions for amortization,
for Federal income tax purposes, attribut-
able to the section 734(b) adjustment).
The Treasury Department and IRS may
consider providing guidance with respect
to this issue in the future and request com-
ments relating thereto.
C. Effective Date
These regulations are proposed to
apply to distributions occurring on or
after the date final regulations are pub-
lished in the Federal Register.
Special Analyses
It has been determined that this notice
of proposed rulemaking is not a signifi-
cant regulatory action as defined in EO
12866. It also has been determined that
section 533(b) of the Administrative Pro-
cedures Act (5 U.S.C. chapter 5) does not
apply to these regulations, and because
these regulations do not impose a collec-
tion of information on small entities, the
Regulatory Flexibility Act (5 U.S.C.
chapter 6) does not apply. Pursuant to
section 7805(f) of the Internal Revenue
Code, this notice of proposed rulemaking
will be submitted to the Chief Counsel for
Advocacy of the Small Business Admin-
istration for comment on its impact on
small business.
Comments and Public Hearing
Before these proposed regulations are
adopted as final regulations, considera-
tion will be given to any written com-
ments (a signed original and eight (8)
copies) that are submitted timely to the
IRS. All comments will be available for
public inspection and copying. The Trea-
sury Department and IRS specifically re-
quest comments on the clarity of the pro-
posed regulations and how they may be
made easier to understand.
A public hearing has been scheduled
for May 24, 2000, at 10 a.m. in Room
2615, Internal Revenue Building, 1111
Constitution Avenue, NW., Washington,
DC. Due to building security procedures,
visitors must enter at the 10
th
Street en-
trance, located between Constitution and
Pennsylvania Avenues, NW. In addition,
all visitors must present photo identifica-
tion to enter the building. Because of ac-
cess restrictions, visitors will not be ad-
mitted beyond the immediate entrance
area more than 15 minutes before the
hearing starts. For information about
having your name placed on the building
access list to attend the hearing, see the
“FOR FURTHER INFORMATION
CONTACT” section of this preamble.
The rules of 26 CFR 601.601(a)(3)
apply to the hearing.
Persons that wish to present oral com-
ments at the hearing must submit written
comments and an outline of the topics to
be discussed and the time devoted to each
topic (signed original and eight (8)
copies) by April 24, 2000.
A period of 10 minutes will be allotted
to each person for making comments.
An agenda showing the scheduling of
the speakers will be prepared after the
deadline for receiving outlines has
passed. Copies of the agenda will be
available free of charge at the hearing.
Drafting Information
The principal author of these proposed
regulations is Robert G. Honigman, Of-
fice of the Assistant Chief Counsel
(Passthroughs & Special Industries).
However, other personnel from the Trea-
sury Department and IRS participated in
their development.
* * * * *
Proposed Amendments to the
Regulations
Accordingly, 26 CFR part 1 is pro-
posed to be amended as follows:
PART 1—INCOME TAXES
Paragraph 1. The authority citation for
part 1 continues to read in part as follows:
Authority: 26 U.S.C. 7805 * * *
Par. 2. Section 1.197–2 is amended
by:
1. Revising paragraphs (h)(12)(ii),
(h)(12)(iv), and (h)(12)(vi).
2. Adding Examples 28, 29, and 30to
paragraph (k).
3. Adding a sentence at the end of
paragraph (l)(1).
The additions and revisions read as fol-
lows:
§1.197–2 Amortization of goodwill and
other intangibles.
* * * * *
(h) * * *
(12) * * *
(ii) Section 732(b) adjustments— (A)
In general. The anti-churning rules of
this paragraph (h) apply to any increase in
the adjusted basis of a section 197(f)(9)
intangible under section 732(b) to the ex-
tent that the basis increase exceeds the
total unrealized appreciation from the in-
tangible allocable to –
(1) Partners other than the distributee
partner or persons related to the distribu-
tee partner;
(2) If the distributed intangible is a sec-
tion 197(f)(9) intangible acquired by the
partnership on or before August 10, 1993,
the distributee partner and persons related
to the distributee partner to the extent that –
(i) They acquired an interest or inter-
ests in the partnership after August 10,
1993; and
(ii) Such interest or interests were held
after August 10, 1993, by a person or per-
sons other than the distributee partner or
persons who were related to the distribu-
tee partner, and the acquisition of such in-
terest or interests by such person or per-
sons was not part of a transaction or series
of related transactions in which the dis-
tributee partner or persons related to the
distributee partner subsequently acquired
such interest or interests; and
(3) If the distributed intangible is a sec-
tion 197(f)(9) intangible that is acquired
by the partnership after August 10, 1993,
and that is not amortizable with respect to
the partnership, the distributee partner
and persons related to the distributee part-
ner to the extent that –
(i) They acquired an interest or interests
in the partnership after the partnership ac-
quired the distributed intangible; and
(ii) Such interest or interests were held
after the partnership acquired the distrib-
uted intangible, by a person or persons
other than the distributee partner or per-
sons who were related to the distributee
partner, and the acquisition of such inter-
est or interests by such person or persons
was not part of a transaction or series of
related transactions in which the distribu-
tee partner or persons related to the dis-
tributee partner subsequently acquired
such interest or interests.
(B) Effect of retroactive elections. For
purposes of paragraph (h)(12)(ii)(A) of
this section, references to August 10,
1993, are treated as references to July 25,

February 14, 20006362000–7 I.R.B.
1991, if the relevant party made a valid
retroactive election under §1.197–1T.
(C) Intangible still subject to anti-
churning rules. Notwithstanding para-
graph (h)(12)(ii) of this section, in apply-
ing the provisions of this paragraph (h)
with respect to subsequent transfers, the
distributed intangible remains subject to
the provisions of this paragraph (h) in a
percentage (determined at the time of the
distribution) equal to –
(1) The sum of –
(i) The amount of the distributed intangi-
ble’s basis that is nonamortizable under
paragraph (g)(2)(ii)(B) of this section; and
(ii) The total unrealized appreciation
inherent in the intangible reduced by the
amount of the increase in the adjusted
basis of the distributed intangible under
section 732(b) to which the anti-churning
rules do not apply; over –
(2) The fair market value of such intan-
gible.
(D) Partner’s allocable share of unre-
alized appreciation from the intangible.
The amount of unrealized appreciation
from an intangible that is allocable to a
partner is the amount of taxable gain that
would have been allocated to that partner
if the partnership had sold the intangible
immediately before the distribution for
its fair market value in a fully taxable
transaction.
(E) Acquisition of partnership interest
by contribution. Solely for purposes of
paragraphs (h)(12)(ii)(A)(2) and (3) of
this section, a partner who acquires an in-
terest in a partnership in exchange for a
contribution of property to the partnership
is deemed to acquire a pro rata portion of
that interest in the partnership from each
person who is a partner in the partnership
at the time of the contribution based on
each such partner’s proportionate interest
in the partnership. However, if the part-
ner contributed the distributed section
197(f)(9) intangible to the partnership, the
interest acquired by such partner in ex-
change for the intangible is treated as not
being described in paragraphs
(h)(12)(ii)(A)(2) or (3) of this section.
* * * * *
(iv) Section 734(b) adjustments— (A)
In general. The anti-churning rules of
this paragraph (h) do not apply to a con-
tinuing partner’s share of an increase in
the basis of a section 197(f)(9) intangible
held by a partnership under section 734(b)
to the extent that the continuing partner is
an eligible partner.
(B) Eligible partner. For purposes of
this paragraph (h)(12)(iv), eligible partner
means –
(1) A continuing partner that is not the
distributee partner or a person related to
the distributee partner;
(2) With respect to any section
197(f)(9) intangible acquired by the part-
nership on or before August 10, 1993, a
continuing partner that is the distributee
partner or a person related to the distribu-
tee partner to the extent that –
(i) The distributee partner’s interest in
the partnership was acquired after August
10, 1993; and
(ii) Such interest was held after August
10, 1993 by a person or persons who were
not related to the distributee partner, and
the acquisition of such interest by such
person or persons was not part of a trans-
action or series of related transactions in
which the distributee partner or persons
related to the distributee partner subse-
quently acquired such interest; or
(3) With respect to any section
197(f)(9) intangible acquired by the part-
nership after August 10, 1993, that is not
amortizable with respect to the partner-
ship, a continuing partner that is the dis-
tributee partner or a person related to the
distributee partner to the extent that –
(i) The distributee partner’s interest in
the partnership was acquired after the
partnership acquired the relevant intangi-
ble; and
(ii) Such interest was held after the
partnership acquired the relevant intangi-
ble by a person or persons who were not
related to the distributee partner, and the
acquisition of such interest by such per-
son or persons was not part of a transac-
tion or series of related transactions in
which the distributee partner or persons
related to the distributee partner subse-
quently acquired such interest.
(C) Effect of retroactive elections. For
purposes of paragraph (h)(12)(iv)(A) of
this section, references to August 10,
1993, are treated as references to July 25,
1991, if the distributee partner made a
valid retroactive election under
§1.197–1T.
(D) Partner’s share of basis increase.
For purposes of this paragraph
(h)(12)(iv), a continuing partner’s share
of a basis increase is equal to –
(1) The total basis increase allocable to
the intangible; multiplied by
(2) A fraction equal to –
(i) The unrealized appreciation from
the intangible that would have been allo-
cated to the continuing partner if the part-
nership had sold the intangible immedi-
ately before the distribution for its fair
market value in a fully taxable transac-
tion; over
(ii) The total unrealized appreciation
from the intangible that would have been
realized by the partnership if the partner-
ship had sold the intangible immediately
before the distribution for its fair market
value in a fully taxable transaction.
(E) Interests acquired by contribu
tion— (1) Application of paragraphs
(h)(12)(iv)(B)(2) and (3) of this section.
Solely for purposes of paragraphs
(h)(12)(iv)(B)(2) and (3) of this section, a
partner who acquires an interest in a part-
nership in exchange for a contribution of
property to the partnership is deemed to
acquire a pro rata portion of that interest
in the partnership from each person who
is a partner in the partnership at the time
of the contribution based on each such
partner’s proportionate interest in the
partnership. However, if the partner con-
tributed the distributed section 197(f)(9)
intangible to the partnership, the interest
acquired by such partner in exchange for
the intangible is treated as not being de-
scribed in paragraphs (h)(12)(iv)(B)(2) or
(3) of this section.
(2) Special rule with respect to para-
graph (h)(12)(iv)(B)(1) of this section.
Solely for purposes of paragraph
(h)(12)(iv)(B)(1) of this section, if a dis-
tribution that gives rise to an increase in
the basis under section 734(b) of a section
197(f)(9) intangible held by the partner-
ship is undertaken as part of a series of re-
lated transactions that include a contribu-
tion of the intangible to the partnership by
a continuing partner, the continuing part-
ner is treated as related to the distributee
partner to the extent that the continuing
partner’s partnership interest was re-
ceived in exchange for the intangible.
(F) Effect of section 734(b) adjustment
on partners’ capital accounts. If one or
more partners are subject to the anti-
churning rules under this paragraph (h)
with respect to a section 734(b) adjust-
ment allocable to an intangible asset, tax-
payers may use any reasonable method to

determine amortization of the asset for
book purposes, provided that the method
used does not contravene the purposes of
the anti-churning rules under section 197
and this paragraph (h). A method will be
considered to contravene the purposes of
the anti-churning rules if the effect of the
book adjustments resulting from the
method is such that any portion of the tax
deduction for amortization attributable to
the section 734 adjustment is allocated,
directly or indirectly, to a partner who is
subject to the anti-churning rules with re-
spect to such adjustment.
* * * * *
(vi) Partner is or becomes a user of
partnership intangible— (A) General
rule.If, as part of a series of related trans-
actions that includes a transaction de-
scribed in paragraph (h)(12)(ii), (iii), (iv),
or (v) of this section, an anti-churning
partner becomes (or remains) a user of an
intangible that is treated as transferred in
the transaction (as a result of the partners
being treated as having owned their pro-
portionate share of partnership assets), the
anti-churning rules shall apply to the pro-
portionate share of such intangible that is
treated as transferred by the anti-churning
partner, notwithstanding the application
of paragraph (h)(12)(ii), (iii), (iv), or (v)
of this section.
* * * * *
(k) * * *
Example 28. Distribution of section 197(f)(9) in-
tangible to partner who acquired partnership inter-
est prior to the effective date. (i) In 1990, A, B, and
C each contribute $150 cash to form general partner-
ship ABC for the purpose of engaging in a consult-
ing business and a software manufacturing business.
The partners agree to share partnership profits and
losses equally. In 2000, the partnership distributes
the consulting business to A in liquidation of A’s en-
tire interest in ABC. The only asset of the consult-
ing business is a nonamortizable intangible, which
has a fair market value of $180 and a basis of $0. At
the time of the distribution, the adjusted basis of A’s
interest in ABC is $150. A is not related to B or C.
(ii) Under section 732(b), A’s adjusted basis in the
intangible distributed by ABC is $150, a $150 increase
over the basis of the intangible in ABC’s hands. In de-
termining whether the anti-churning rules apply to any
portion of the basis increase, A is treated as having
owned and used A’s proportionate share of partnership
property. Thus, A is treated as holding an interest in
the intangible during the transition period. Because
the intangible was not amortizable prior to the enact-
ment of section 197, the section 732(b) increase in the
basis of the intangible may be subject to the anti-
churning provisions. Paragraph (h)(12)(ii) of this sec-
tion provides that the anti-churning provisions apply
to the extent that the section 732(b) adjustment ex-
ceeds the total unrealized appreciation from the intan-
gible allocable to partners other than A or persons re-
lated to A, as well as certain other partners whose pur-
chase of their interests meet certain criteria. Because
B and C are not related to A, and A’s acquisition of its
partnership interest does not satisfy the necessary cri-
teria, the section 732(b) basis increase is subject to the
anti-churning provisions to the extent that it exceeds B
and C’s proportionate share of the unrealized apprecia-
tion from the intangible. B and C’s proportionate
shares of the unrealized appreciation from the intangi-
ble is $120 (2/3 of $180). This is the amount of gain
that would be allocated to B and C if the partnership
sold the intangible immediately before the distribution
for its fair market value of $180. Therefore, $120 of
the section 732(b) basis increase is not subject to the
anti-churning rules. The remaining $30 of the section
732(b) basis increase is subject to the anti-churning
rules. Accordingly, A is treated as having two intangi-
bles, an amortizable section 197 intangible with an ad-
justed basis of $120 and a new amortization period of
15 years and a nonamortizable intangible with an ad-
justed basis of $30.
(iii) In applying the anti-churning rules to future
transfers of the distributed intangible, under para-
graph (h)(12)(ii)(C) of this section, one-third of the
intangible will continue to be subject to the anti-
churning rules, determined as follows: The sum of
the amount of the distributed intangible’s basis that
is nonamortizable under paragraph (g)(2)(ii)(B) of
this section ($0) and the total unrealized apprecia-
tion inherent in the intangible reduced by the
amount of the increase in the adjusted basis of the
distributed intangible under section 732(b) to which
the anti-churning rules do not apply ($180 - $120 =
$60), over the fair market value of the distributed in-
tangible ($180).
Example 29. Distribution of section 197(f)(9) in-
tangible to partner who acquired partnership inter-
est after the effective date. (i) The facts are the same
as in example 28, except that B and C form ABC in
1990. A does not acquire an interest in ABC until
1995. In 1995, A contributes $150 to ABC in ex-
change for a one-third interest in ABC. At the time
of the distribution, the adjusted basis of A’s interest
in ABC is $150.
(ii) As in Example 28, the anti-churning rules do
not apply to the increase in the basis of the intangi-
ble distributed to A under section 732(b) to the ex-
tent that it does not exceed the unrealized apprecia-
tion from the intangible allocable to B and C. Under
paragraph (h)(12)(ii) of this section, the anti-churn-
ing provisions also do not apply to the section
732(b) basis increase to the extent of A’s allocable
share of the unrealized appreciation from the intan-
gible because A acquired the ABC interest from an
unrelated person after August 10, 1993, and the in-
tangible was acquired by the partnership before A
acquired the ABC interest. Under paragraph
(h)(12)(ii)(E) of this section, A is deemed to acquire
the ABC partnership interest from an unrelated per-
son because A acquired the ABC partnership interest
in exchange for a contribution to the partnership of
property other than the distributed intangible and, at
the time of the contribution, no partner in the part-
nership was related to A. Consequently, the increase
in the basis of the intangible under section 732(b) is
not subject to the anti-churning rules to the extent of
the total unrealized appreciation from the intangible
allocable to A, B, and C. The total unrealized appre-
ciation from the intangible allocable to A, B, and C
is $180 (the gain the partnership would have recog-
nized if it had sold the intangible for its fair market
value immediately before the distribution). Because
this amount exceeds the section 732(b) basis in-
crease of $150, the entire section 732(b) basis in-
crease is amortizable.
(iii) In applying the anti-churning rules to future
transfers of the distributed intangible, under para-
graph (h)(12)(ii)(C) of this section, one-sixth of the
intangible will continue to be subject to the anti-
churning rules, determined as follows: The sum of
the amount of the distributed intangible’s basis that
is nonamortizable under paragraph (g)(2)(ii)(B) of
this section ($0) and the total unrealized apprecia-
tion inherent in the intangible reduced by the
amount of the increase in the adjusted basis of the
distributed intangible under section 732(b) to which
the anti-churning rules do not apply ($180 - $150 =
$30), over the fair market value of the distributed in-
tangible ($180).
Example 30. Distribution of section 197(f)(9) in-
tangible contributed to the partnership by a partner.
(i) The facts are the same as in Example 29, except
that C purchased the intangible used in the consult-
ing business in 1988 for $60 and contributed the in-
tangible to ABC in 1990. At that time, the intangible
had a fair market value of $150 and an adjusted tax
basis of $60. When ABC distributes the intangible
to A in 2000, the intangible has a fair market value
of $180 and a basis of $60.
(ii) As in Examples 28and 29, the adjusted basis
of the intangible in A’s hands is $150 under section
732(b). However, the increase in the adjusted basis of
the intangible under section 732(b) is only $90 ($150
adjusted basis after the distribution compared to $60
basis before the distribution). Pursuant to paragraph
(g)(2)(ii)(B) of this section, A steps into the shoes of
ABC with respect to the $60 of A’s adjusted basis in
the intangible that corresponds to ABC’s basis in the
intangible and this portion of the basis is nonamortiz-
able. B and C are not related to A, A acquired the
ABC interest from an unrelated person after August
10, 1993, and the intangible was acquired by ABC be-
fore A acquired the ABC interest. Therefore, under
paragraph (h)(12)(ii) of this section, the section
732(b) basis increase is amortizable to the extent of A,
B, and C’s allocable share of the unrealized apprecia-
tion from the intangible. The total unrealized appreci-
ation from the intangible that is allocable to A, B, and
C is $120. If ABC had sold the intangible immedi-
ately before the distribution to A for its fair market
value of $180, it would have recognized gain of $120,
which would have been allocated $10 to A, $10 to B,
and $100 to C under section 704(c). Because A, B,
and C’s allocable share of the unrealized appreciation
from the intangible exceeds the section 732(b) basis
increase in the intangible, the entire $90 of basis in-
crease is amortizable by A. Accordingly, after the dis-
tribution, A will be treated as having two intangibles,
an amortizable section 197 intangible with an ad-
justed basis of $90 and a new amortization period of
15 years and a nonamortizable intangible with an ad-
justed basis of $60.
(iii) In applying the anti-churning rules to future
transfers of the distributed intangible, under paragraph
(h)(12)(ii)(C) of this section, one-half of the intangible
will continue to be subject to the anti-churning rules,
determined as follows: The sum of the amount of the
distributed intangible’s basis that is nonamortizable
under paragraph (g)(2)(ii)(B) of this section ($60) and
2000–7 I.R.B.637February 14, 2000

the total unrealized appreciation inherent in the intan-
gible reduced by the amount of the increase in the ad-
justed basis of the distributed intangible under section
732(b) to which the anti-churning rules do not apply
($120 - $90 = $30), over the fair market value of the
distributed intangible ($180).
* * * * *
(l) * * *
(1) In general. * * * Paragraphs
(h)(12)(ii), (iv), and (vi) of this section
apply to partnership distributions occur-
ring on or after the date final regulations
are published in the Federal Register.
* * * * *
David Mader,
Acting Deputy Commissioner
of Internal Revenue.
(Filed by the Office of the Federal Register on Janu-
ary 20, 2000, 1:19 p.m., and published in the issue of
the Federal Register for January 25, 2000, 65 F.R.
3903)
February 14, 20006382000–7 I.R.B.

2000–7 I.R.B.iFebruary 14, 2000
Revenue rulings and revenue procedures
(hereinafter referred to as “rulings”) that
have an effect on previous rulings use the
following defined terms to describe the
effect:
Amplified describes a situation where
no change is being made in a prior pub-
lished position, but the prior position is
being extended to apply to a variation of
the fact situation set forth therein. Thus,
if an earlier ruling held that a principle
applied to A, and the new ruling holds
that the same principle also applies to B,
the earlier ruling is amplified. (Compare
with modified, below).
Clarified is used in those instances
where the language in a prior ruling is
being made clear because the language
has caused, or may cause, some confu-
sion. It is not used where a position in a
prior ruling is being changed.
Distinguisheddescribes a situation
where a ruling mentions a previously
published ruling and points out an essen-
tial difference between them.
Modified is used where the substance
of a previously published position is
being changed. Thus, if a prior ruling
held that a principle applied to A but not
to B, and the new ruling holds that it ap-
plies to both A and B, the prior ruling is
modified because it corrects a published
position. (Compare with amplified and
clarified, above).
Obsoleted describes a previously pub-
lished ruling that is not considered deter-
minative with respect to future transac-
tions. This term is most commonly used
in a ruling that lists previously published
rulings that are obsoleted because of
changes in law or regulations. A ruling
may also be obsoleted because the sub-
stance has been included in regulations
subsequently adopted.
Revoked describes situations where the
position in the previously published rul-
ing is not correct and the correct position
is being stated in the new ruling.
Superseded describes a situation where
the new ruling does nothing more than
restate the substance and situation of a
previously published ruling (or rulings).
Thus, the term is used to republish under
the 1986 Code and regulations the same
position published under the 1939 Code
and regulations. The term is also used
when it is desired to republish in a single
ruling a series of situations, names, etc.,
that were previously published over a pe-
riod of time in separate rulings. If the
new ruling does more than restate the
substance of a prior ruling, a combination
of terms is used. For example, modified
and superseded describes a situation
where the substance of a previously pub-
lished ruling is being changed in part and
is continued without change in part and it
is desired to restate the valid portion of
the previously published ruling in a new
ruling that is self contained. In this case
the previously published ruling is first
modified and then, as modified, is super-
seded.
Supplemented is used in situations in
which a list, such as a list of the names of
countries, is published in a ruling and
that list is expanded by adding further
names in subsequent rulings. After the
original ruling has been supplemented
several times, a new ruling may be pub-
lished that includes the list in the original
ruling and the additions, and supersedes
all prior rulings in the series.
Suspended is used in rare situations to
show that the previous published rulings
will not be applied pending some future
action such as the issuance of new or
amended regulations, the outcome of
cases in litigation, or the outcome of a
Service study.
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations in current use and for-
merly used will appear in material published in the
Bulletin.
A—Individual.
Acq.—Acquiescence.
B—Individual.
BE—Beneficiary.
BK—Bank.
B.T.A.—Board of Tax Appeals.
C.—Individual.
C.B.—Cumulative Bulletin.
CFR—Code of Federal Regulations.
CI—City.
COOP—Cooperative.
Ct.D.—Court Decision.
CY—County.
D—Decedent.
DC—Dummy Corporation.
DE—Donee.
Del. Order—Delegation Order.
DISC—Domestic International Sales Corporation.
DR—Donor.
E—Estate.
EE—Employee.
E.O.—Executive Order.
ER—Employer.
ERISA—Employee Retirement Income Security Act.
EX—Executor.
F—Fiduciary.
FC—Foreign Country.
FICA—Federal Insurance Contribution Act.
FISC—Foreign International Sales Company.
FPH—Foreign Personal Holding Company.
F.R.—Federal Register.
FUTA—Federal Unemployment Tax Act.
FX—Foreign Corporation.
G.C.M.—Chief Counsel’s Memorandum.
GE—Grantee.
GP—General Partner.
GR—Grantor.
IC—Insurance Company.
I.R.B.—Internal Revenue Bulletin.
LE—Lessee.
LP—Limited Partner.
LR—Lessor.
M—Minor.
Nonacq.—Nonacquiescence.
O—Organization.
P—Parent Corporation.
PHC—Personal Holding Company.
PO—Possession of the U.S.
PR—Partner.
PRS—Partnership.
PTE—Prohibited Transaction Exemption.
Pub. L.—Public Law.
REIT—Real Estate Investment Trust.
Rev. Proc.—Revenue Procedure.
Rev. Rul.—Revenue Ruling.
S—Subsidiary.
S.P.R.—Statements of Procedral Rules.
Stat.—Statutes at Large.
T—Target Corporation.
T.C.—Tax Court.
T.D.—Treasury Decision.
TFE—Transferee.
TFR—Transferor.
T.I.R.—Technical Information Release.
TP—Taxpayer.
TR—Trust.
TT—Trustee.
U.S.C.—United States Code.
X—Corporation.
Y—Corporation.
Z—Corporation.
Definition of Terms

February 14, 2000ii2000–7 I.R.B.
Numerical Finding List
1
Bulletins 2000–1 through 2000–6
Announcements:
2000–1, 2000–2 I.R.B. 294
2000–2, 2000–2 I.R.B. 295
2000–3, 2000–2 I.R.B. 296
2000–4, 2000–3 I.R.B. 317
2000–5, 2000–4 I.R.B. 427
2000–6, 2000–4 I.R.B. 428
2000–7, 2000–6 I.R.B. 586
2000–8, 2000–6 I.R.B. 586
Notices:
2000–1, 2000–2 I.R.B. 288
2000–3, 2000–4 I.R.B. 413
2000–4, 2000–3 I.R.B. 313
2000–5, 2000–3 I.R.B. 314
2000–6, 2000–3 I.R.B. 315
2000–7, 2000–4 I.R.B. 419
2000–8, 2000–4 I.R.B. 420
2000–9, 2000–5 I.R.B. 449
2000–10, 2000–5 I.R.B. 451
2000–11, 2000–6 I.R.B. 572
Proposed Regulations:
REG–208254–90, 2000–6 I.R.B. 577
REG–101492–98, 2000–3 I.R.B. 326
REG–106012–98, 2000–2 I.R.B. 290
REG–103831–99, 2000–5 I.R.B. 452
REG–105089–99, 2000–6 I.R.B. 580
REG–105606–99, 2000–4 I.R.B. 421
REG–111119–99, 2000–5 I.R.B. 455
REG–116048–99, 2000–6 I.R.B. 584
REG–116567–99, 2000–5 I.R.B. 463
REG–116704–99, 2000–3 I.R.B. 325
Revenue Procedures:
2000–1, 2000–1 I.R.B. 4
2000–2, 2000–1 I.R.B. 73
2000–3, 2000–1 I.R.B. 103
2000–4, 2000–1 I.R.B. 115
2000–5, 2000–1 I.R.B. 158
2000–6, 2000–1 I.R.B. 187
2000–7, 2000–1 I.R.B. 227
2000–8, 2000–1 I.R.B. 230
2000–9, 2000–2 I.R.B. 280
2000–10, 2000–2 I.R.B. 287
2000–11, 2000–3 I.R.B. 309
2000–12, 2000–4 I.R.B. 387
2000–13, 2000–6 I.R.B. 515
2000–15, 2000–5 I.R.B. 447
2000–16, 2000–6 I.R.B. 518
2000–20, 2000–6 I.R.B. 553
Revenue Rulings:
2000–1, 2000–2 I.R.B. 250
2000–2, 2000–3 I.R.B. 305
2000–3, 2000–3 I.R.B. 297
2000–4, 2000–4 I.R.B. 331
2000–5, 2000–5 I.R.B. 436
2000–6, 2000–6 I.R.B. 512
2000–9, 2000–6 I.R.B. 497
Treasury Decisions:
8849, 2000–2 I.R.B. 245
8850, 2000–2 I.R.B. 265
Treasury Decisions—Continued
8851, 2000–2 I.R.B. 275
8852, 2000–2 I.R.B.253
8853, 2000–4 I.R.B.377
8854, 2000–3 I.R.B.306
8855, 2000–4 I.R.B.374
8856, 2000–3 I.R.B.298
8857, 2000–4 I.R.B.365
8858, 2000–4 I.R.B.332
8859, 2000–5 I.R.B.429
8860, 2000–5 I.R.B.437
8861, 2000–5 I.R.B.441
8862, 2000–6 I.R.B.466
8863, 2000–6 I.R.B.488
8866, 2000–6 I.R.B.495
8868, 2000–6 I.R.B.491
8869, 2000–6 I.R.B.498
1
A cumulative list of all revenue rulings, revenue
procedures, Treasury decisions, etc., published in
Internal Revenue Bulletins 1999–27 through
1999–52 is in Internal Revenue Bulletin 2000–1,
dated January 3, 2000.

2000–7 I.R.B.iiiFebruary 14, 2000
Finding List of Current Actions on
Previously Published Items
1
Bulletins 2000–1 through 2000–6
Announcements:
99–50
Modified by
Rev. Proc. 2000–20, 2000–6 I.R.B. 553
Notices:
92–48
Obsoleted by
Notice 2000–11, 2000–6 I.R.B. 572
97–19
Modified by
Rev. Proc. 2000–1, 2000–1 I.R.B. 4
98–52
Modified by
Notice 2000–3, 2000–4 I.R.B. 413
98–61
Modified and superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–15, 2000–5 I.R.B. 447
99–8
Obsoleted by
Rev. Proc. 2000–12, 2000–4 I.R.B. 387
Revenue Procedures:
80–18
Modified by
Rev. Proc. 2000–13, 2000–6 I.R.B. 515
89–9
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–20, 2000–6 I.R.B. 553
89–13
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–20, 2000–6 I.R.B. 553
90–21
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–20, 2000–6 I.R.B. 553
91–66
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–20, 2000–6 I.R.B. 553
92–13
Modified, amplified, and superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–11, 2000–3 I.R.B. 309
92–13A
Modified, amplified, and superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–11, 2000–3 I.R.B. 309
92–41
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–20, 2000–6 I.R.B. 553
93–9
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–20, 2000–6 I.R.B. 553
93–10
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–20, 2000–6 I.R.B. 553
94–12
Modified, amplified, and superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–11, 2000–3 I.R.B. 309
Revenue Procedures—Continued
95–42
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–20, 2000–6 I.R.B. 553
96–13
Modified by
Rev. Proc. 2000–1, 2000–1 I.R.B. 4
98–22
Modified and superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–16, 2000–6 I.R.B. 518
98–27
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–12, 2000–4 I.R.B. 387
98–64
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–9, 2000–2 I.R.B. 280
99–1
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–1, 2000–1 I.R.B. 4
99–2
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–2, 2000–1 I.R.B. 73
99–3
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–3, 2000–1 I.R.B. 103
99–4
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–4, 2000–1 I.R.B. 115
99–5
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–5, 2000–1 I.R.B. 158
99–6
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–6, 2000–1 I.R.B. 187
99–7
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–7, 2000–1 I.R.B. 227
99–8
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–8, 2000–1 I.R.B. 230
99–13
Modified and superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–16, 2000–6 I.R.B. 518
99–31
Modified and superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–16, 2000–6 I.R.B. 518
99–49
Modified and amplified by both
Rev. Rul. 2000–4, 2000–4 I.R.B. 331 and
Notice 2000–4, 2000–3 I.R.B. 313
99–51
Superseded by
Rev. Proc. 2000–3, 2000–1 I.R.B. 103
2000–6
Modified by
Rev. Proc. 2000–20, 2000–6 I.R.B. 553
2000–8
Modified by both
Rev. Proc. 2000–16, 2000–6 I.R.B. 518 and
Rev. Proc. 2000–20, 2000–6 I.R.B. 553
Revenue Rulings:
88–36
Modified by
Rev. Rul. 2000–6, 2000–6 I.R.B. 512
Treasury Decisions:
8734
Modified by
T.D. 8856, 2000–3, I.R.B. 298
8804
Modified by
T.D. 8856, 2000–3, I.R.B. 298
1
A cumulative list of current actions on previously
published items in Internal Revenue Bulletins
1999–27 through 1999–52 is in Internal Revenue
Bulletin 2000–1, dated January 3, 2000.

INTERNAL REVENUE BULLETIN
The Introduction at the beginning of this issue describes the purpose and content of this publication. The weekly Internal Revenue
Bulletin is sold on a yearly subscription basis by the Superintendent of Documents. Current subscribers are notified by the
Superintendent of Documents when their subscriptions must be renewed.
CUMULATIVE BULLETINS
The contents of this weekly Bulletin are consolidated semiannually into a permanent, indexed, Cumulative Bulletin. These are
sold on a single copy basis and are not included as part of the subscription to the Internal Revenue Bulletin. Subscribers to the week-
ly Bulletin are notified when copies of the Cumulative Bulletin are available. Certain issues of Cumulative Bulletins are out of print
and are not available. Persons desiring available Cumulative Bulletins, which are listed on the reverse, may purchase them from the
Superintendent of Documents.
HOW TO ORDER
Check the publications and/or subscription(s) desired on the reverse, complete the order blank, enclose the proper remittance,
detach entire page, and mail to the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Please
allow two to six weeks, plus mailing time, for delivery.
WE WELCOME COMMENTS ABOUT THE
INTERNAL REVENUE BULLETIN
If you have comments concerning the format or production of the Internal Revenue Bulletin or suggestions for improving it, we
would be pleased to hear from you. You can e-mail us your suggestions or comments through the IRS Internet Home Page
(www.irs.gov) or write to the IRS Bulletin Unit, OP:FS:FP:P:1, Room 5617, 1111 Constitution Avenue NW, Washington,
DC 20224.
Internal Revenue Service
Washington, DC 20224
Official Business
Penalty for Private Use, $300

Continue sua pesquisa no ChatGPT ou Claude

Conecte o Omnilex para pesquisar o corpus jurídico pelo seu assistente de IA.